View
165
Download
16
Category
Preview:
Citation preview
H 71 0200 0016 k en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT USER MANUAL
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual 0-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 26.07.1999 First edition a 11.02.2000 Changes in related sections b 28.09.2000 Changes in related sections c 18.06.2001 Changes in related sections d 12.03.2002 Changes in related sections e 25.06.2002 Changes in related sections e 19.07.2002 Changes in related sections f 06.12.2002 Changes in related sections g 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI, Changes in related sections h 01.05.2003 Chapter 4.1 in Chapter 4 enclosed (H71 0200 0022 not further needed) k 30.06.2003 Section 4.16 new, section 4.1 integrated in section 4 (H 71 0200 0022
omitted). Changes in related sections for software version B21.
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+Gyr List of associated sections 0-3
List of associated sections The user manual H 71 0200 0016 en comprises the following sections: Section Designation Identification
1 Safety H 71 0200 0019 en
2 Description of unit and technical data H 71 0200 0018 en
3 Mechanical construction H 71 0200 0020 en
4 Function H 71 0200 0021 en
4.1 Overview H 71 0200 0021 en
4.2 Measuring unit H 71 0200 0023 en
4.3 Inputs and outputs H 71 0200 0036 en
4.4 Calendar clock H 71 0200 0243 en
4.5 Time switch H 71 0200 0029 en
4.6 Ripple control receiver H 71 0200 0030 en
4.7 Tariff control H 71 0200 0026 en
4.8 Energy recording H 71 0200 0024 en
4.9 Demand recording H 71 0200 0025 en
4.10 Power factors H 71 0200 0033 en
4.11 Operating time registers H 71 0200 0244 en
4.12 Formation of billing periods (resetting) H 71 0200 0245 en
4.13 Profiles H 71 0200 0032 en
4.14 Monitoring functions H 71 0200 0031 en
4.15 Security system H 71 0200 0038 en
4.16 Operating messages H 71 0200 0242 en
5 Control elements and displays H 71 0200 0035 en
6 Communication interfaces H 71 0200 0247 en
7 Installation and commissioning H 71 0200 0039 en
8 Maintenance and service H 71 0200 0041 en
9 Error messages and measures in event of faults H 71 0200 0042 en
10 Decommissioning, disposal H 71 0200 0043 en
11 Index H 71 0200 0034 en
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual 0-4 Table of contents
Table of contents
1 Safety ____________________________________________1-5 1.1 Safety information ___________________________________________1-5 1.2 Responsibilities ______________________________________________1-5 1.3 Safety regulations____________________________________________1-6 2 Description of unit and technical data____________________2-5 2.1 Survey_____________________________________________________2-5 2.1.1 General view________________________________________________2-5 2.1.2 Purpose of use ______________________________________________2-6 2.1.3 Field of application ___________________________________________2-7 2.1.4 Type designation ____________________________________________2-9 2.1.5 Review of main characteristics_________________________________2-10 2.2 Technical data _____________________________________________2-12 2.2.1 Voltage values _____________________________________________2-12 2.2.2 Secondary current values for transformer rated current In = 1 A _____2-12 2.2.3 Secondary current values for transformer rated current In = 5 A _____2-12 2.2.4 Secondary current values for transformer rated current In = 5//1 A2-13 2.2.5 Secondary starting values ____________________________________2-13 2.2.6 Frequency values ___________________________________________2-14 2.2.7 Power consumption _________________________________________2-14 2.2.8 Measuring accuracy _________________________________________2-14 2.2.9 Calendar clock _____________________________________________2-15 2.2.10 Output values ______________________________________________2-15 2.2.11 Inputs and outputs__________________________________________2-16 2.2.12 Serial interface _____________________________________________2-17 2.2.13 Supplementary power supply__________________________________2-17 2.2.14 Voltage behaviour___________________________________________2-17 2.2.15 External influences __________________________________________2-18 2.2.16 Weight and dimensions ______________________________________2-19 2.2.17 Connections _______________________________________________2-20 2.3 Connection diagrams ________________________________________2-21 2.3.1 Meters for three-phase three-wire networks ______________________2-21 2.3.2 Meters for three-phase four-wire networks _______________________2-22 2.3.3 Control inputs / output contacts _______________________________2-23 2.3.4 Extension board ____________________________________________2-23
H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+Gyr Table of contents 0-5
3 Mechanical construction ______________________________3-5 3.1 Case ______________________________________________________ 3-5 3.2 Connections ________________________________________________ 3-8 3.3 Face plate_________________________________________________ 3-10 4 Function ________________________________________ 4.1-7 4.1 Overview ________________________________________________ 4.1-7 4.1.1 Block schematic diagram ____________________________________ 4.1-7 4.1.2 Measuring system _________________________________________ 4.1-9 4.1.3 Signal processing_________________________________________ 4.1-10 4.1.4 Signal utilization__________________________________________ 4.1-10 4.1.5 Tariff control ____________________________________________ 4.1-10 4.1.6 Data preparation for billing _________________________________ 4.1-11 4.1.7 Memory ________________________________________________ 4.1-11 4.1.8 Power supply ____________________________________________ 4.1-11 4.1.9 Supplementary power supply _______________________________ 4.1-11 4.1.10 Extension board__________________________________________ 4.1-11 4.1.11 Communication unit_______________________________________ 4.1-12 4.1.12 Interface board __________________________________________ 4.1-12 4.1 Overview ________________________________________________ 4.1-5 4.1.1 Block schematic diagram ____________________________________ 4.1-5 4.1.2 Measuring system _________________________________________ 4.1-7 4.1.3 Signal processing__________________________________________ 4.1-8 4.1.4 Signal utilization___________________________________________ 4.1-8 4.1.5 Tariff control _____________________________________________ 4.1-8 4.1.6 Data preparation for billing __________________________________ 4.1-9 4.1.7 Memory _________________________________________________ 4.1-9 4.1.8 Power supply _____________________________________________ 4.1-9 4.1.9 Supplementary power supply ________________________________ 4.1-9 4.1.10 Extension board___________________________________________ 4.1-9 4.1.11 Communication unit_______________________________________ 4.1-10 4.1.12 Interface board __________________________________________ 4.1-10 4.2 Measuring unit ____________________________________________ 4.2-5 4.2.1 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.2-5 4.2.2 Signal conversion and processing _____________________________ 4.2-7 4.2.3 Formation of measured quantities_____________________________ 4.2-9 4.3 Inputs and outputs ________________________________________ 4.3-5 4.3.1 Terminal layout ___________________________________________ 4.3-5 4.3.2 Parametrizing the terminal designations________________________ 4.3-6
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual 0-6 Table of contents
4.3.3 Terminal designations ______________________________________ 4.3-7 4.3.4 Further inputs and outputs__________________________________ 4.3-11 4.4 Calendar clock ____________________________________________ 4.4-5 4.4.1 Survey___________________________________________________ 4.4-5 4.4.2 Summer/winter time________________________________________ 4.4-5 4.4.3 Time elements ____________________________________________ 4.4-5 4.4.4 Time base ________________________________________________ 4.4-6 4.4.5 Power reserve_____________________________________________ 4.4-6 4.4.6 Changing the date and time__________________________________ 4.4-6 4.4.7 Synchronizing by the external synchronization signal ______________ 4.4-6 4.4.8 Synchronizing via communication interface______________________ 4.4-8 4.4.9 Meter behaviour with time deviations __________________________ 4.4-8 4.4.10 Display and readout _______________________________________ 4.4-10 4.5 Time switch ______________________________________________ 4.5-5 4.5.1 Survey___________________________________________________ 4.5-5 4.5.2 Determination of the valid day table ___________________________ 4.5-6 4.5.3 Changeover to a new switching program _______________________ 4.5-7 4.6 Tariff control via ripple control receiver_________________________ 4.6-5 4.6.1 Field of application _________________________________________ 4.6-5 4.6.2 Functional principle of ripple control systems ____________________ 4.6-5 4.6.3 Functional description of ripple control receiver __________________ 4.6-6 4.6.4 Test key of ripple control receiver _____________________________ 4.6-9 4.6.5 Technical data of ripple control receiver ________________________ 4.6-9 4.6.6 Ripple control receiver data on tariff face plate _________________ 4.6-10 4.6.7 Behaviour of ripple control receiver with mains failure ____________ 4.6-11 4.6.8 Connection diagrams ______________________________________ 4.6-11 4.6.9 Display and readout _______________________________________ 4.6-12 4.7 Tariff control______________________________________________ 4.7-5 4.7.1 Survey tariff control ________________________________________ 4.7-5 4.7.2 Control table ______________________________________________ 4.7-6 4.7.3 Registers/functions_________________________________________ 4.7-7 4.7.4 Activation of control signals __________________________________ 4.7-8 4.8 Energy recording __________________________________________ 4.8-5 4.8.1 Survey___________________________________________________ 4.8-5 4.8.2 Available measured quantities for measured value formation _______ 4.8-6 4.8.3 Formation of energy proportions ______________________________ 4.8-7 4.8.4 Types of energy recording ___________________________________ 4.8-8 4.8.5 Tariff control_____________________________________________ 4.8-10
H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+Gyr Table of contents 0-7
4.8.6 Formation of stored values _________________________________ 4.8-10 4.8.7 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.8-11 4.8.8 Energy registers for primary and secondary data________________ 4.8-12 4.9 Demand recording _________________________________________ 4.9-5 4.9.1 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.9-5 4.9.2 Available measured quantities for measured value formation _______ 4.9-6 4.9.3 Formation of demand values_________________________________ 4.9-7 4.9.4 Formation of mean value of demand __________________________ 4.9-9 4.9.5 Mean demand value for last integrating period _________________ 4.9-11 4.9.6 Maximum demand ________________________________________ 4.9-12 4.9.7 Controlling the integrating period ____________________________ 4.9-14 4.9.8 New start of integrating period ______________________________ 4.9-16 4.9.9 Demand inhibition ________________________________________ 4.9-18 4.9.10 Signal transfer ___________________________________________ 4.9-19 4.9.11 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.9-19 4.10 Power factors____________________________________________ 4.10-5 4.10.1 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.10-5 4.10.2 Formation of mean value during integrating period ______________ 4.10-6 4.10.3 Formation of mean value during resetting period________________ 4.10-8 4.10.4 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.10-9 4.11 Operating time registers ___________________________________ 4.11-5 4.11.1 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.11-5 4.12 Formation of billing periods (resetting)________________________ 4.12-5 4.12.1 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.12-5 4.12.2 Reset block______________________________________________ 4.12-5 4.12.3 Identification of stored values_______________________________ 4.12-6 4.12.4 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.12-6 4.13 Profiles _________________________________________________ 4.13-5 4.13.1 Event log _______________________________________________ 4.13-5 4.13.2 Load profile _____________________________________________ 4.13-8 4.13.3 Memory management ____________________________________ 4.13-13 4.14 Monitoring functions ______________________________________ 4.14-5 4.14.1 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.14-5 4.14.2 Functional principle _______________________________________ 4.14-5 4.14.3 Application possibilities for event signals ______________________ 4.14-7 4.14.4 Voltage monitoring _______________________________________ 4.14-7 4.14.5 Current monitoring _______________________________________ 4.14-8 4.14.6 Demand monitoring_______________________________________ 4.14-8
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual 0-8 Table of contents
4.14.7 Power factor monitoring____________________________________ 4.14-9 4.15 Security system __________________________________________ 4.15-5 4.15.1 Introduction _____________________________________________ 4.15-5 4.15.2 Security levels____________________________________________ 4.15-5 4.15.3 Security attributes ________________________________________ 4.15-6 4.15.4 Security levels and their application___________________________ 4.15-7 4.15.5 Allocation of access rights to data and parameter groups _________ 4.15-9 4.16 Operating messages_______________________________________ 4.16-5 4.16.1 Survey__________________________________________________ 4.16-5 4.16.2 Recording of operating messages ____________________________ 4.16-6 4.16.3 Sending an SMS message __________________________________ 4.16-8 5 Control elements and displays__________________________5-5 5.1 Control elements ____________________________________________5-5 5.1.1 Display buttons______________________________________________5-5 5.1.2 Control of display via optical interface____________________________5-5 5.1.3 Reset button ________________________________________________5-6 5.2 Liquid crystal display _________________________________________5-7 5.2.1 Introduction ________________________________________________5-7 5.2.2 Basic layout_________________________________________________5-7 5.2.3 Index system _______________________________________________5-9 5.3 Types of display ____________________________________________5-10 5.3.1 Operating display ___________________________________________5-10 5.3.2 Display list_________________________________________________5-11 5.3.3 Service list_________________________________________________5-14 5.4 Optical test output __________________________________________5-16 6 Communication interfaces_____________________________6-5 6.1 Survey_____________________________________________________6-5 6.2 Optical interface _____________________________________________6-6 6.3 S0 interface_________________________________________________6-6 6.4 RS232 interface _____________________________________________6-7 6.5 RS485 interface _____________________________________________6-7 6.6 CS interface ________________________________________________6-8 6.7 M-Bus interface______________________________________________6-8 6.8 Possibilities for data readout ___________________________________6-9 6.8.1 Data readout via optical interface _______________________________6-9 6.8.2 Readout to IEC 62056-21 (former IEC 1107) _____________________6-10 6.8.3 Readout to DLMS ___________________________________________6-12
H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+Gyr Table of contents 0-9
6.9 Further information sources about communication interfaces ________ 6-13 7 Installation and commissioning ________________________7-5 7.1 Introduction ________________________________________________ 7-5 7.2 Material and tools required ____________________________________ 7-5 7.3 Basic information for connecting meter __________________________ 7-6 7.3.1 Connection to low voltage with current transformers________________ 7-6 7.3.2 Connection to medium and high voltage (Aron circuit) ______________ 7-6 7.3.3 Connection to medium and high voltage (three-phase four-wire circuit) 7-8 7.4 Mounting the meter __________________________________________ 7-9 7.5 Connecting meter __________________________________________ 7-11 7.6 Check of connections________________________________________ 7-15 7.7 Commissioning and functional check ___________________________ 7-16 8 Maintenance and service ______________________________8-5 8.1 Meter check ________________________________________________ 8-5 8.2 Meter testing _______________________________________________ 8-5 8.2.1 Test mode _________________________________________________ 8-5 8.2.2 Measuring times_____________________________________________ 8-6 8.2.3 Optical test output ___________________________________________ 8-7 8.2.4 Creep test _________________________________________________ 8-7 8.2.5 Starting test active part _______________________________________ 8-8 8.2.6 Starting test reactive part _____________________________________ 8-8 8.3 Input of formatted commands _________________________________ 8-9 8.4 Changing values in set mode _________________________________ 8-10 8.5 Changing the battery________________________________________ 8-11 9 Error messages and measures in event of faults ____________9-5 9.1 Error messages _____________________________________________ 9-5 9.1.1 Structure of an error message _________________________________ 9-5 9.1.2 Error groups________________________________________________ 9-6 9.2 Operating faults ____________________________________________ 9-10 9.3 Disconnecting meters _______________________________________ 9-11 9.3.1 Removing meters with transformer connection (ZxD400xx) _________ 9-11 9.3.2 Removing meter with direct connection (ZMD300xx)_______________ 9-13 9.4 Repairing meters ___________________________________________ 9-14 10 Decommissioning, disposal ___________________________10-5 10.1 Decommissioning___________________________________________ 10-5 10.2 Disposal __________________________________________________ 10-5 11 Index____________________________________________11-3
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual 0-10 Introduction
Introduction The present user manual applies to the meters specified on the title page. The user manual contains all the information required for application of the meters for the intended purpose. This includes:
• Provision of knowledge concerning characteristics, construction and function of the meters
• Information about possible dangers, their consequences and measures to prevent any danger
• Details concerning the performance of all work throughout the service life of the meters (parametrization, installation, commissioning, opera-tion, maintenance, shutting down and disposal)
The contents of this user manual are intended for technically qualified personnel of energy supply companies responsible for the system planning, installation and commissioning, operation, maintenance, decommissioning and disposal of the meters. Users of this manual are familiar from their training with the basic princi-ples of electrical engineering, in particular with the principles of energy measurement, including circuitry types, connection technology, etc. This user manual is divided in a logical manner suitable for learning and application, i.e. the individual chapters follow the sequence of information probably required during the various phases of the service life of the meters. This provides the following structure:
• Chapter 1 Safety
• Chapter 2 Description of unit and technical data
• Chapter 3 Mechanical construction
• Chapter 4 Function
• Chapter 5 Control elements and displays
• Chapter 6 Communication interfaces
• Chapter 7 Installation and commissioning
• Chapter 8 Maintenance and service
• Chapter 9 Error messages and measures in event of faults
• Chapter 10 Decommissioning, disposal
• Chapter 11 Index
Range of validity
Purpose
Target group
Conditions
Subdivision
H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+Gyr Introduction 0-11
The structure and significance of meter type designations are described in chapter 2 "Description of unit and technical data". The following conven-tions are employed in this user manual for representing type designations:
• The lower case letter "x" can be used as an unknown to indicate differ-ent versions (e.g. ZxD410xT for the ZFD410AT, ZMD410AT, ZFD410CT and ZMD410CT meters).
• The digit pair "00" can be used to indicate accuracy data (e.g. ZxD400xx for the ZxD405xx and ZxD410xx meters).
• The abbreviated type designation ZMD or ZFD meters can be used when all three-phase four-wire meters or three-phase three-wire meters are meant.
• The following collective terms are also sometimes used instead of the type designation:
- "Direct connection meters" for the ZMD300xx meters
- "Transformer connection meters" for the ZxD400xx meters
- "Active energy meters" for the ZMD300Ax and ZxD400Ax meters
- "Combimeters" for the ZMD300Cx and ZxD400Cx meters
• Of the four digit extension board designation (e.g. 2400) only the first 3 digits represent the function of the board; the fourth digit is an unknown (the first 3 digits in the type designation, e.g. 240, are used for details of additional functions, while the fourth digit indicates whether a load profile is present or not).
Type designation
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual 0-12 Introduction
H 71 0200 0019 b en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL
1 Safety
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0019 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 1-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 26.07.1999 First edition a 17.04.2000 Text adaptations after internal revision b 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0019 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrTable of contents 1-3
Table of contents
1 Safety ___________________________________________ 1-5 1.1 Safety information ___________________________________________ 1-5 1.2 Responsibilities______________________________________________ 1-5 1.3 Safety regulations ___________________________________________ 1-6
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0019 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 1-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0019 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrSafety 1-5
1 Safety This section describes the safety information used in this manual, outlines the responsibilities and lists the safety regulations to be observed.
1.1 Safety information Attention is drawn as follows in the individual chapters of this user manual with classified word symbols and pictographs to the relevant danger level, i.e. the severity and probability of any danger:
Danger
Definition of Danger
For a possibly dangerous situation, which could result in severe physical injury or fatality.
Warning
Definition of Warning
For a possibly dangerous situation, which could result in minor physical injury or material damage.
Note
Definition of Note
For general details and other useful information to simplify the work.
In addition to the danger level, all safety information also describes the type and source of the danger, its possible consequences and measures to counteract the danger.
1.2 Responsibilities The owner of the meters – normally the power supply company – is responsible that all persons engaged on work with meters:
1. Have read and understood the relevant sections of the user manual.
2. Are sufficiently qualified for the work to be performed.
3. Strictly observe the safety regulations (according to section 1.3) and the operating information in the individual chapters.
In particular, the owner of the meters bears responsibility
• for the protection of persons,
• prevention of material damage
• and the training of personnel.
Landis+Gyr AG provides training courses for this purpose on specific equipment; please contact the relevant agent if interested.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0019 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 1-6 Safety
1.3 Safety regulations The following safety regulations must be observed at all times:
• The conductors to which the meter will be connected must not be under voltage during installation or change of the meter. Contact with live parts is dangerous to life. The relevant preliminary fuses should there-fore be removed and kept in a safe place until the work is completed, so that other persons cannot replace them unnoticed.
• Local safety regulations must be observed. Installation of the meters must be performed exclusively by technically qualified and suitably trained personnel.
• Secondary circuits of current transformers must be short-circuited (at the test terminal block) without fail before opening. The high voltage produced by the interrupted current transformer is dangerous to life and destroys the transformer.
• Transformers in medium or high voltage systems must be earthed on one side or at the neutral point on the secondary side. Otherwise they can be statically charged to a voltage which exceeds the insulation strength of the meter and is also dangerous to life.
• The meters must be held securely during installation. They can cause injuries if dropped.
• Meters which have fallen must not be installed, even if no damage is apparent. They must be returned for testing to the service and repair department responsible (or the manufacturer). Internal damage can result in functional disorders or short-circuits.
• The meters must on no account be cleaned with running water or with high pressure devices. Water penetrating can cause short-circuits.
H 71 0200 0136 d en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 AT / CT USER MANUAL
2 Description of unit and technical data
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 2-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 28.02.2002 First edition − 14.01.2002 Maximum current 120 A under special conditions a 18.04.2002 Extension board 600x (6 control inputs) cancelled b 29.07.2002 Chapt. 1.2.8 Meter constant 2000 pulses per kWh dropped c 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 d 30.06.2003 Operating messages function new, software version section new,
technical data adapted
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+Gyr Table of contents 2-3
Table of contents
2 Description of unit and technical data____________________2-5 2.1 Survey ____________________________________________________ 2-5 2.1.1 General view _______________________________________________ 2-5 2.1.2 Purpose of use______________________________________________ 2-6 2.1.3 Field of application___________________________________________ 2-6 2.1.4 Type designation ____________________________________________ 2-8 2.1.5 Review of main characteristics _________________________________ 2-9 2.2 Technical data _____________________________________________ 2-11 2.2.1 Voltage values _____________________________________________ 2-11 2.2.2 Current values _____________________________________________ 2-11 2.2.3 Starting values _____________________________________________ 2-12 2.2.4 Frequency values___________________________________________ 2-12 2.2.5 Power consumption _________________________________________ 2-12 2.2.6 Measuring accuracy _________________________________________ 2-12 2.2.7 Calendar clock _____________________________________________ 2-13 2.2.8 Output values______________________________________________ 2-13 2.2.9 Inputs and outputs _________________________________________ 2-13 2.2.10 Serial interface_____________________________________________ 2-14 2.2.11 Supplementary power supply _________________________________ 2-14 2.2.12 Voltage behaviour __________________________________________ 2-14 2.2.13 External influences__________________________________________ 2-15 2.2.14 Weight and dimensions ______________________________________ 2-16 2.2.15 Connections _______________________________________________ 2-17 2.3 Connection diagrams ________________________________________ 2-19 2.3.1 Meters for three-phase three-wire networks______________________ 2-19 2.3.2 Control inputs / output contacts _______________________________ 2-19 2.3.3 Extension board____________________________________________ 2-20
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 2-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+Gyr Description of unit and technical data 2-5
2 Description of unit and technical data This chapter provides you with a brief overview of the meters ZMD300xT. It also specifies their technical data and shows the most common connection diagrams.
2.1 Survey
2.1.1 General view
The ZMD300xT meters have the following appearance, with the ZMD300CT combimeter having two optical test outputs (for reactive and active energy consumption) while the ZMD300AT active energy meter has only one for active energy:
Fig. 2.1 General view of meter (example ZMD300CT)
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 2-6 Description of unit and technical data
The meter case is made of antistatic plastic (polycarbonate). The upper part of the case is provided with two transparent plastic viewing windows, affording a view of the main face plate (top) and the tariff face plate (bottom). The lower part of the case is additionally glass-fibre reinforced. For further details refer to material list no. H 71 0264 0060.
The upper viewing window with the main face plate is secured on the upper right side with a calibration seal, while the upper part of the case is secured on the upper left side with a manufacturer seal (warranty) or a second calibration seal.
The lower viewing window is in the form of a hinged front door, secured with a company seal. The tariff face plate with the connection diagram on the rear side, the battery compartment, the reset button and (if present) the communication unit are situated under this front door.
The terminal cover is available in various lengths in order to ensure the required free space for the connections. All relevant data for the meter are provided on the face plates inscribed in utility specific form. Openings enable the operation of the two display buttons and ensure an uninterrupted view of the liquid crystal display, the optical test outputs and the optical interface for automatic readout of meter data.
2.1.2 Purpose of use
The combimeters ZMD300CT record active and reactive energy consumption in three-phase four-wire networks on low voltage and from this determine the required electrical measured quantities. They are connected directly to the phase conductors at the measuring point.
The data determined are displayed (LCD) and are also available at the optical interface for data acquisition, with communication unit also as required via CS, RS232, RS485, PSTN modem, GSM modem, etc. When provided with transmission contacts, the meters can also be used as transmission contact meters for telemetering. The tariffs can be controlled internally or externally.
With communication unit the meters can also be used for recording counting pulses for other physical media (e.g. water or gas volumes).
Any other application of these meters is considered not for the intended purpose.
2.1.3 Field of application
The combimeters ZMD300CT can be used for direct connection at the low voltage level. They are primarily used by medium consumers.
ZMD300CT meters have a comprehensive tariff structure. This extends from seasonal tariffs to multiple energy and demand tariffs. ZMD300CT meters can be supplemented with various additional functions, including:
• Energy recording as advance
• Measurement of individual phases
Case
Main and tariff face plate
Additional functions
H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+Gyr Description of unit and technical data 2-7
• Measurement of instantaneous values
- Voltages
- Currents
- Frequency
- Phase angles
• Power factor cosϕ (ZMD300CT only)
• Calculation of apparent consumption (ZMD300CT only)
• Sliding maximum demand
• Load profile memory
- Demand
- Energy
- Voltages, currents and frequency
- Power factor cosϕ (ZMD300CT only)
• Stored values
• Event log memory
• Monitoring
- of voltage, current and demand
- of power factor (ZMD300CT only)
• Event signals for
- voltage failures
- undervoltage and overvoltage occurencies
- exceeding of current and demand limits
- falling below power factor limits (ZMD300CT only)
- Status messages
• Time switch
• integrated ripple control receiver
• Pulse inputs for external meters
• Additional control inputs and output contacts in a permanently fitted extension board
• Background lighting for LCD display (optional)
• LCD display readable without power supply (battery required)
• Installation aids
• Interfaces for various communication forms and paths in an exchange-able communication unit situated outside the calibration liability.
• Signalling of important events as operating messages to the power supply company (sending of SMS messages, control of an arrow in the display, drive for an output contact, etc.)
• Supplementary power supply for communication with the meter if no measuring voltage is present.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 2-8 Description of unit and technical data
More detailed information concerning individual exchangeable communica-tion unit can be found in the relevant separate user manuals.
2.1.4 Type designation
Three-phase three-wire network (F circuit, Aron circuit)Three-phase four-wire network (M circuit)
Type of circuit
Accuracy class
0 No additional control inputs2 2 additional control inputs4 4 additional control inputs
Version
ZMD 10 .4207
Additional functions
1005
CT
ZFDZMD
3
1 to IEC0.5 to IEC
44
21 24 41 44
Energy tariffs; external tariff control via control inputsEnergy tariffs; internal tariff control via time switch (additionally possible via control inputs)Energy and demand tariffs; external tariff control via control inputsEnergy and demand tariffs; internal tariff control via time switch (additionally possible via control inputs)
Type of connection34
Direct connection with digital measuring systemTransformer connection with digital measuring system
Measured quantitiesActive and reactive energyActive energy
CA
All versions with 3 control inputs and 2 output contacts.
DesignComplex tariff functions, modular communicationComplex tariff functions, integrated interface
TR
Additional control inputs on extension board
0 No additional output contacts2 2 additional output contacts4 4 additional output contacts6 6 additional output contacts
Additional output contacts on extension board
0 No additional hardware3 Integrated ripple control receiver5 Supplementary power supply
Hardware functions on extension board
0 No load profile7 Load profile
Profile
The codes for version, additional functions and communication unit are not normally specified in the type designation in this user manual, unless necessary for understanding.
The communication unit is not a part of this type designation, since it is a complete unit in itself. Users can change it at any time without opening the calibration seal. Every communication unit has its own user manual.
The hardware version is distinguished by the series designation. The 1st hardware generation (series 1) has no series designation, while for the 2nd
Series designation
H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+Gyr Description of unit and technical data 2-9
hardware generation (series 2) the series designation S2 is printed on the nameplate directly after the type designation.
The software version stored in the meter cannot be recognised externally. It can, however, be determined by reading out the meter identification (see section 6.8 "Data readout possibilities"). Specific meter characteristics are present or not depending on the software version. For example by parametrizing from software version B20 the form of phase angle representation can be selected or from software version B21 operating messages for the occurrence of important events can be signalled to the power supply company as SMS messages.
2.1.5 Review of main characteristics
ZMD300xT meters have the following basic characteristics:
• Recording of active, reactive and apparent energy in all four quadrants (ZMD300CT) or recording of active energy imported and exported (ZMD300AT)
• Tariff system with energy and demand tariffs, stored values, load profiles etc.
• Extended functions such as monitoring functions, sliding maximum demand, etc. (for ZMD300CT additionally power factor cosϕ)
• Tariff control
- External via control inputs (ZMD300xT21 and ZMD300xT41)
- Internal - by integral time switch (ZMD300xT24 and ZMD300xT44) - by event signals based on monitored values as voltage, current demand etc. or - by integrated ripple control receiver (extension board 0030/0430)
• Display of data with a liquid crystal display (LCD)
• Active and reactive power per phase and true RMS values of voltages and currents by means of digital signal processing (DSP) chips
• Compliance with IEC accuracy class 1 for active energy consumption and class 1 for reactive energy (ZMD300CT)
• Flexible measuring system through parametrization (definition of different variables by software)
• Wide range of measurement from starting current to maximum current
• Optical interface according to IEC 62056-21 and DLMS
- für die direkte Auslesung der Zählerdaten
- for service functions of meter, extension board and communication unit (e.g. parametrization)
• Inputs for recording fixed valency pulses (communication unit)
• Output contacts (solid-state relays) for fixed valency pulses, control signals and status messages
• Installation aids
Software version
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 2-10 Description of unit and technical data
- Indication of phase voltages, phase angles, rotating field and direction of energy
• Storage of event information, e.g. voltage failures, exceeding of thres-holds or error messages. Event information can be read out via the available interfaces. Important events can be communicated to the power supply company as operating messages (sending of SMS messages, control of an arrow in the display, drive for an output contact, etc.).
• Interfaces such as CS, RS232, RS485, modem, etc. for remote transmission of data (communication unit)
• Supplementary power supply for communication with the meter if no measuring voltage is present
H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+Gyr Description of unit and technical data 2-11
2.2 Technical data
2.2.1 Voltage values
Rated voltage Un
• ZMD300xT
- Permissible range ........................... 3 x 110/190 V to 3 x 240/415 V
Note: This meter can also be operated with only one or two phases without loss of accuracy.
Voltage range ............................................................. 0.8 to 1.15 x Un
2.2.2 Current values
Basic current Ib ....................................... selectable: 5, 10, 20 or 40 A
Maximum current Imax ............... selectable: 40, 60, 80, 100 or 120 A
Note: The maximum current 100 or 120 A is only permitted, if the terminal opening has a diameter of 9.5 mm and a conductor cross-section of 35 mm2 is used.
Starting current
• According to IEC ................................................................... 0.5 % Ib
• Typical ..................................................................... approx. 0.3 % Ib
Note: The meter uses the starting power, not the starting current, to determine the starting limit.
Maximum measuring range ............................ approx. 15 mA to 120 A
Note: The maximum current 100 or 120 A is only permitted, if the terminal opening has a diameter of 9.5 mm and a conductor cross-section of 35 mm2 is used.
Loading capacity
• Measurements ........................................................................... 120 A
• Thermal .................................................................................... 120 A
• Short-circuit ≤ 10 ms ................................................................ 5000 A
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 2-12 Description of unit and technical data
2.2.3 Starting values
Typical starting power
at rated voltage of 230 V
• Related to basic current Ib 5 10 20 40 .A
• M circuit approx. 3.5 7 15 30 W
The meter measures as soon as a phase reaches the specified starting power.
2.2.4 Frequency values
Rated frequency fn ............................................................ 50 or 60 Hz
Frequency range ................................... see 2.2.6 "Measuring accuracy"
2.2.5 Power consumption
Power consumption per phase
Communication unit without CU with CU
• For phase voltage (full load) ........................ 100 V ................... 100 V Active power (typical) .................................. 0.6 W ................... 0.8 W Apparent power (typical) ............................ 0.8 VA .................. 1.0 VA
• For phase voltage (full load) ........................ 240 V ................... 240 V Active power (typical) .................................. 1.1 W ................... 1.3 W Apparent power (typical) ............................ 1.5 VA .................. 1.8 VA
• Current path (typical) .................................................................. 10 A Apparent power (typical) ........................................................ 0.03 VA
2.2.6 Measuring accuracy
Accuracy
• Accuracy class to IEC 61036 .................................................... Class 1
• Absolute accuracy active (with balanced load and cosϕ = 1) .......................................... ± 1.0 %
• Absolute accuracy reactive (ZMD300CT only)............................ ± 1.0 %
Note: The combimeter ZMD300CT scarcely reveals higher measurement deviations for reactive energy as for active energy consumption. Hence accuracy class 1 applies also to the reactive part for ZMD300CT.
H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+Gyr Description of unit and technical data 2-13
2.2.7 Calendar clock
Movement accuracy .............................................................. < 5 ppm
Power reserve for bridging voltage interruptions
• Supercap ................................................................... typically 20 days
• Battery (optional) ................................................................. 10 years
Note: The power reserve of the battery is reduced if the LCD is repeatedly switched on by pressing the display buttons when no voltage is applied.
2.2.8 Output values
Display
• Type ............................................................. LCD liquid crystal display
• Digit size value field ................................................................... 8 mm
• Number of positions value field ................................................ up to 8
• Digit size index field ................................................................... 6 mm
• Number of positions index field ................................................ up to 8
Meter constant R
• selectable ...................................... 500, 1000 pulses per kWh or kvarh
Test output active and reactive power (ZxD400xT)
• Type ..................................................................................... LED red
• Pulse frequency (dependent on meter constant R and measured value)
- at Un and 10 A .................................................. approx.1, 2 or 4 Hz
- maximum .............................................................................. 20 Hz
• Pulse width ........................................................................ 2 or 40 ms
2.2.9 Inputs and outputs
Control inputs
• Control voltage Ut ....................................................... 100 to 240 VAC
• Current input ............................................... < 2 mA ohmic at 230 VAC
Note: Same meter for all voltages by re-parametrization.
Output contacts
• Type .......................................................................... solid-state relay
• Voltage ................................................................ 12 to 240 VAC/VDC
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 2-14 Description of unit and technical data
• Current .......................................................................... max. 100 mA
• Switching frequency .......................................................... max. 50 Hz
2.2.10 Serial interface
Optical interface
• Type ...................................................... serial, bi-directional interface
• Max. baud rate .................................................................. 9600 Baud
• Standards ............ IEC 62056-21 and dlms (IEC 62056-42/46/53/61/62)
• Application ........................................... Data readout, service functions
2.2.11 Supplementary power supply
Situated on extension board type 0250
• Nominal voltage range ................... 100 to 160 V DC / 100 to 240 V AC
• Operation range ......................................................... 80 to 115 % Un
• Frequency range ............................................................... 50 or 60 Hz
• Power consumption ................................................................... 2.2 W
2.2.12 Voltage behaviour
Voltage interruption
• Bridging time .................................................... according to IEC 0.5 s
• Data storage ............................................................ after further 0.2 s
• Disconnection ........................................................ after approx. 2.5 s
Un
0 tafter 0.5 s approx. 2.5 s
Bridging time
Data saved
0.7 s
Display switched off
Fig. 2.2 Behaviour in event of voltage failure
Restoration of voltage
• Ready for service (depending on duration of failure) ........after 1 to 5 s*
• Recognition of energy direction and phase voltage .......... after 1 to 3 s*
* operated with 3 phases
H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+Gyr Description of unit and technical data 2-15
Un
0max. 3 s max. 5 s
Detection ofenergy direction and phase voltages
All functionsavailable
t
Fig. 2.3 Behaviour when voltage restored
2.2.13 External influences
Temperature range
• Operation ................................................................. -25 °C to +70 °C
• Storage .................................................................... -40 °C to +85 °C
Temperature coefficient
• Range ................................................................ from -25°C to +70°C
• Typical mean value .................................................... ± 0.012 % per K
• With cosϕ=1 (from 0.05 In to Imax) ............................. ± 0.02 % per K
• With cosϕ=0.5 (from 0.1 In to Imax) ............................ ± 0.03 % per K
Protection class ...................................................... IP 51 to IEC 60529
Electromagnetic compatibility
• Electrostatic discharges .............................................. to IEC 61000-4-2
- Contact discharges ................................................................. 15 kV
• Electromagnetic high frequency fields ................. to nach IEC 61000-4-3
- 80 MHz to 2 GHz ................................................... 10 or 30 V per m
• Line transients (Burst)................................................ to IEC 61000-4-4
- for current and voltage circuits not under load .......................... 4 kV
- for current and voltage circuits under load to IEC 62053-21/22/23 ............................................................. 2 kV
- for auxiliary circuits > 40 V ...................................................... 1 kV
• Line transients (Surge)............................................... to IEC 61000-4-5
- for current and voltage circuits ................................................. 4 kV
- for auxiliary circuits > 40 V ...................................................... 1 kV
• Radio interference suppression ....................... to IEC/CISPR 22 Class B
Insulation strength .......................................... 4 kV at 50 Hz for 1 min
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 2-16 Description of unit and technical data
Impulse voltage strength
• Impulse voltage 1.2/50µs mains connections ................................. 8 kV
• Impulse voltage 1.2/50µs control connections ............................... 6 kV
2.2.14 Weight and dimensions
Weight ........................................................................... approx. 1.5 kg
External dimensions ......................................... comply with DIN 43857
• Width .................................................................................... 177 mm
• Height (with short terminal cover) ........................................... 244 mm
• Height (with standard terminal cover) .................................. 281.5 mm
• Depth ..................................................................................... 75 mm
Suspension triangle
• Height (suspension eyelet open) ............................................. 206 mm
• Height (suspension eyelet covered) ......................................... 190 mm
• Width .................................................................................... 150 mm
Terminal cover
• Short ............................................................................. no free space
• Standard ................................................................ 40 mm free space
• Long ...................................................................... 60 mm free space
H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+Gyr Description of unit and technical data 2-17
6.2 75
190 20
6
281.
5
2640
75150177
Fig. 2.4 Meter dimensions (standard terminal cover)
2.2.15 Connections
Phase connections
• Type ................................................................... screw type terminals
• Diameter .... 8.5 mm for Imax up to 80 A, 9.5 mm for Imax up to 100 A ...............................(up to 120 A with conductor cross-section 35 mm2)
• Maximum conductor cross-section
- cable ............................................................ 35 mm2 (up to 120 A)
- strand ............................................................. 25 mm2 (up to 80 A)
• Minimum conductor cross-section ............................................. 4 mm2
• Screw dimensions .................................................................. M6 x 14
- head diameter ........................................................... max. 6.6 mm
- cross-slot ...................................... type Z, size 2, to ISO-4757-1983
- slot ................................................................ 0.8 +0.2/+0.06 mm
• Tightening torque ............................................................. max. 3 Nm
• Adaptation to plug adapters for Geyer terminals, ODU contacts, Amphe-nol Tuchel plugs is ensured.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 2-18 Description of unit and technical data
Other connections
• Type ............................................... screwless spring-loaded terminals
• Maximum current of voltage outputs .............................................. 1 A
• Maximum voltage of inputs ........................................................ 250 V
15.3
14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 1219.75
19 16 16 1613 13 13 13.5
Spacings ofterminal openings
Spacings of terminal stampingsfor smaller conductors
Ø 8.5 or Ø 9.5
Fig. 2.5 Terminal dimensions
H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+Gyr Description of unit and technical data 2-19
2.3 Connection diagrams
Note
Binding connection diagrams
The following connection diagrams should be considered examples. The connection diagrams provided at the rear of the front door and visible when the door is open are always binding for the installation.
2.3.1 Meters for three-phase three-wire networks
ZMD300xT
xx
xx
xx
L1L2L3N
1
2 2
4 7 9 10
11
123
5
6
8 11
Fig. 2.6 Connection diagram of measuring unit ZMD300xT
2.3.2 Control inputs / output contacts
100 - 240 V
1615 13 14
G E1 P1 mB
40 41
K1Basic version:
3 control inputs
2 output contacts (solid-state relays)
Signal assignment and numberingof terminals for free parametrization
42
K2
Beispiel:
Fig. 2.7 Connection diagram fixed control inputs / output contacts (example)
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 2-20 Description of unit and technical data
2.3.3 Extension board
4200
G KA KB
Extension board 4200
4 control inputs
2 output contacts (solid-state relays)
Signal assignment and numberingof terminals for free parametrization
G E2 P2
1915 15 18 15 33 34
K3 K4
44 43 45
Fig. 2.8 Connection diagram extension board with 4 control inputs and
2 output contacts (example)
2400
G KA KB
Extension board 2400
2 control inputs
4 output contacts (solid-state relays)
Signal allocation and numberingof terminals for free parametrization1915 15 18
K5 K6
47 46 48
K3 K4
44 43 45
Fig. 2.9 Connection diagram extension board with 2 control inputs and
4 output contacts (example)
0600
Extension board 0600
no control inputs
6 output contacts (solid-state relays)
Signal allocation and numberingof terminals for free parametrization
K5 K6
47 46 48
K3 K4
44 43 45
K7 K8
50 49 5144 Fig. 2.10 Connection diagram extension board with 6 output contacts (example)
H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+Gyr Description of unit and technical data 2-21
0250 Extension board 0250
no control inputs
2 output contacts (solid-state relays)
Signal allocation and numberingof terminals for free parametrization
64 6461
K3 K4
54 53 5561
100 ... 240 V AC100 ... 160 V DC
with supplementary power supply
Fig. 2.11 Connection diagram extension board with supplementary power
supply (example)
0030
Lx
Extension board 0030
no control inputs
no output contacts
Signal allocationfor free parametrization
30
with ripple controlreceiver
E
Fig. 2.12 Connection diagram extension board with ripple control receiver
(example)
0430
Lx
Extension board 0430
no control inputs
4 output contacts (solid-state relays)
Signal allocationfor free parametrization
30 61
K5 K6
64 65 66
K3 K4
61 62 63
with ripple controlreceiver
E
Fig. 2.13 Connection diagram extension board with ripple control receiver and
4 output contacts (example)
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 2-22 Description of unit and technical data
H 71 0200 0137 c en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 AT / CT USER MANUAL
3 Mechanical construction
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 3-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 26.07.1999 First edition a 18.04.2002 Terminals of extension board adapted b 01.05.2002 ZMD310AT included c 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+GyrTable of contents 3-3
Table of contents
3 Mechanical construction _____________________________ 3-5 3.1 Case ______________________________________________________ 3-5 3.2 Connections ________________________________________________ 3-8 3.3 Face plate_________________________________________________ 3-10
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 3-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+GyrMechanical construction 3-5
3 Mechanical construction This section describes the mechanical construction of the ZMD300xT meter.
3.1 Case The internal construction of the meters is not described here, since they are protected following calibration and official certification on delivery by a manufacturer and calibration seal. It is not permitted to open the meters after delivery. The front door is only secured with a company seal and can be opened to operate the reset button, to change the battery, to exchange the tariff face plate with connection diagram or to fit or remove a commu-nication unit (see fig. 3.2 and separate user manuals for the communica-tion units available).
The following drawing shows the meter components visible from outside.
1
67910
2
345
11
16
14
15
16
8
1213
Fig. 3.1 Meter ZMD300xT
1 Combined suspension hanger (open or concealed)
9 Display button "up"
2 Screw with manufacturer seal 10 Display button "down" 3 Optical test output reactive energy
consumption (red), ZMD300CT only 11 Front door with tariff face plate
4 Optical test output active energy consumption (red)
12 Upper part of case
5 Liquid crystal display (LCD) 13 Lower part of case 6 Optical interface 14 Company seal for front door 7 Screw with calibration seal 15 Terminal cover 8 Front section with main face plate 16 Terminal cover screws with
company seals
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 3-6 Mechanical construction
The front door must be opened to give access to the battery compartment, reset button and tariff face plate. To fit or remove the communication unit the terminal cover must also be removed.
12
3
Fig. 3.2 Meter with front door open
1 Battery compartment 2 Reset button R 3 Communication unit or dummy
Fig. 3.3 Meter with communication unit withdrawn
If the meter has no communication unit, this is replaced by a dummy case.
H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+GyrMechanical construction 3-7
An additional component, which is easy to install, allows the use of a stan-dard padlock instead of an utility seal.
Seal componentinserted
Padlock
Front door
Fig. 3.4 Front door sealing using a padlock
The seal component is stowed away in a holder under the front door when not in use.
R
Front dooropen
Reset buttonBattery compartment
Seal component
Recess for transformer plate
Compartment forcommunication unit
Fig. 3.5 Stowage of seal component when not in use
The seal component is installed as follows:
• Slide the seal component into the vertical slot at an angle, as shown, (position 1) until it contacts the rear wall.
• Now turn the seal component until it is horizontal and slide it down into position 2 as illustrated. The two bulges firmly fix the seal component into the lateral grooves.
Seal component
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 3-8 Mechanical construction
insertin position 1
Position 1
Position 2
Seal component
and turnin position 2
Frontdoor
Side view Front view Fig. 3.6 Seal component for use with padlock
3.2 Connections
Fig. 3.7 Meter with terminal cover removed (example ZMD300CT)
The terminal block with all meter connections is situated under the terminal cover. Two company seals in the fixing screws of the terminal cover prevent unauthorized access to the phase connections and therefore to unrecorded current consumption.
H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+GyrMechanical construction 3-9
The top row of terminals (level 1) consists of spring-loaded terminals and comprises
• Extension board terminals on the left depending on version up to 4 control inputs or 6 output contacts or a combination of these with maximum 6 inputs and outputs, voltage connections for a separate supply or test input of the ripple control receiver
• Communication unit terminals on the right
The center row of terminals (level 0) likewise consists of spring-loaded terminals and comprises
• Voltage outputs U1, U2, U3 and N, tapped from the relevant phase input
• 3 fixed control inputs with a common return line G (electrically isolated)
• 2 output contacts for transferring fixed valency pulses or control signals (electrically isolated)
The lower row of terminals comprises the phase connections with input and output of the circuit for each phase with the voltage connection in between and neutral conductor at far right.
Voltage outputs
Control inputs andoutput contacts
Inputs and/oroutput contacts ofextension board
Pulseinputs
Communicationinterfaces
Communication unit
L1 L2 L3 N
Phase connections
U1 U2 U3 N
Fig. 3.8 Terminal layout ZMD300xT
Terminal layout (example ZMD300xT)
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 3-10 Mechanical construction
3.3 Face plate The face plate is divided into two parts and is designed to customer specifi-cations. It contains all relevant data about the meter. The main face plate is situated under the plastic viewing window, which is secured by a calibration seal. Recesses permit operation of the display buttons "down" and "up" for control of the liquid crystal display.
Landis+Gyr Dialog
Cl. 11000 impkWh
Readout
Three-phase four-wire meterZMD310CT41.4207 Nr. 73 994 0323 x 230/400 V 10(80) A 50 Hz
2000
T1 T2 T3
9
2 3
4
5
710
1112
Cl. 1 impkvarh
1
SET Test
6
8
Fig. 3.9 Main face plate (example ZMD310CT)
1 Optical test output reactive energy (with accuracy class – ZMD300CT only) 2 Meter constant R1 (referred to primary values) or R2 3 Optical test output active energy (with accuracy class) 4 Optical interface 5 Approval symbol 6 Type of connection 7 Display button "up" / Display button "down" 8 Symbol for dual protective insulation 9 Meter data (type designation, serial number, rated values, year of construction) 10 Liquid crystal display (LCD) 11 Arrows for present status indication 12 Status indication
The operating elements and displays are described more fully in section 5.
Main face plate
H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+GyrMechanical construction 3-11
The tariff face plate is placed in the front door, which can be swung out sideways to the left and is secured by a company seal. The connection diagram of the meter is shown on the back of the face plate and is there-fore visible with the front door open.
+A
Energy
T = Energy tariff
8.8...F.F0.0
Display checkFunctional errorIdentification
0.1.00.9.10.9.2
Reset counterTime-of-dayDate
K1: 1 imp = 10 Wh (+A)K2: 1 imp = 10 Wh (-A)K3: 1 imp = 10 varh (+Ri)K4: 1 imp = 10 varh (+Rc)K5: 1 imp = 10 varh (-Ri)K6: 1 imp = 10 varh (-Rc)
1
2
3
5
1.8.T
-A +Ri +Rc -Ri -Rc
1.8.02.8.T2.8.0
5.8.T5.8.0
6.8.T6.8.0
7.8.T7.8.0
8.8.T8.8.0 Total energy
S01: 1 imp = 10 WhS02: 1 imp = 10 Wh
Ownership designation
73 994 032
6
C.6.02:1.8.03:1.8.0
Battery hours counterS01S02
Pmax cumulated1.2.0 2.2.0 5.2.0 6.2.0 7.2.0 8.2.0Last tm/P running1.4.0 2.4.0 5.4.0 6.4.0 7.4.0 8.4.0Plast integr. period1.5.0 2.5.0 5.5.0 6.5.0 7.5.0 8.5.0Pmax1.6.0 2.6.0 5.6.0 6.6.0 7.6.0 8.6.0
4
Fig. 3.10 Tariff face plate (example ZMD310CT)
1 General data appearing in the display 2 Measured quantities 3 Pulse input data 4 Output contact data 5 Ownership designation 6 Communication unit data (if present)
Tariff face plate
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 3-12 Mechanical construction
H 71 0200 0021 e en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL
4 Function
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.1-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 26.07.1999 First edition a 17.04.2000 Chapter "VDEW functions" removed. Chapter "Monitoring functions"
added. b 29.09.2000 Several changes c 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 d 01.05.2003 Chapter 4.1 added (H 71 0200 0022 cancelled) e 30.06.2003 Section 4.16 new, section 4.1 integrated (H 71 0200 0022 omitted)
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Table of contents 4.1-3
Table of contents
4 Function ________________________________________ 4.1-7 4.1 Overview ________________________________________________ 4.1-7 4.1.1 Block schematic diagram ____________________________________ 4.1-7 4.1.2 Measuring system _________________________________________ 4.1-9 4.1.3 Signal processing_________________________________________ 4.1-10 4.1.4 Signal utilization__________________________________________ 4.1-10 4.1.5 Tariff control ____________________________________________ 4.1-10 4.1.6 Data preparation for billing _________________________________ 4.1-11 4.1.7 Memory ________________________________________________ 4.1-11 4.1.8 Power supply ____________________________________________ 4.1-11 4.1.9 Supplementary power supply _______________________________ 4.1-11 4.1.10 Extension board__________________________________________ 4.1-11 4.1.11 Communication unit_______________________________________ 4.1-12 4.1.12 Interface board __________________________________________ 4.1-12 4.2 Measuring unit ____________________________________________ 4.2-5 4.2.1 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.2-5 4.2.2 Signal conversion and processing _____________________________ 4.2-7 4.2.3 Formation of measured quantities_____________________________ 4.2-9 4.3 Inputs and outputs ________________________________________ 4.3-5 4.3.1 Terminal layout ___________________________________________ 4.3-5 4.3.2 Parametrizing the terminal designations________________________ 4.3-6 4.3.3 Terminal designations ______________________________________ 4.3-7 4.3.4 Further inputs and outputs _________________________________ 4.3-11 4.4 Calendar clock ____________________________________________ 4.4-5 4.4.1 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.4-5 4.4.2 Summer/winter time _______________________________________ 4.4-5 4.4.3 Time elements ____________________________________________ 4.4-5 4.4.4 Time base _______________________________________________ 4.4-6 4.4.5 Power reserve ____________________________________________ 4.4-6 4.4.6 Changing the date and time _________________________________ 4.4-6 4.4.7 Synchronizing by the external synchronization signal _____________ 4.4-6 4.4.8 Synchronizing via communication interface _____________________ 4.4-8 4.4.9 Meter behaviour with time deviations __________________________ 4.4-8 4.4.10 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.4-10 4.5 Time switch ______________________________________________ 4.5-5
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.1-4 Table of contents
4.5.1 Survey___________________________________________________ 4.5-5 4.5.2 Determination of the valid day table ___________________________ 4.5-6 4.5.3 Changeover to a new switching program _______________________ 4.5-7 4.6 Tariff control via ripple control receiver_________________________ 4.6-5 4.6.1 Field of application _________________________________________ 4.6-5 4.6.2 Functional principle of ripple control systems ____________________ 4.6-5 4.6.3 Functional description of ripple control receiver __________________ 4.6-6 4.6.4 Test key of ripple control receiver _____________________________ 4.6-9 4.6.5 Technical data of ripple control receiver ________________________ 4.6-9 4.6.6 Ripple control receiver data on tariff face plate _________________ 4.6-10 4.6.7 Behaviour of ripple control receiver with mains failure ____________ 4.6-11 4.6.8 Connection diagrams ______________________________________ 4.6-11 4.6.9 Display and readout _______________________________________ 4.6-12 4.7 Tariff control______________________________________________ 4.7-5 4.7.1 Survey tariff control ________________________________________ 4.7-5 4.7.2 Control table ______________________________________________ 4.7-6 4.7.3 Registers/functions_________________________________________ 4.7-7 4.7.4 Activation of control signals __________________________________ 4.7-8 4.8 Energy recording __________________________________________ 4.8-5 4.8.1 Survey___________________________________________________ 4.8-5 4.8.2 Available measured quantities for measured value formation _______ 4.8-6 4.8.3 Formation of energy proportions ______________________________ 4.8-7 4.8.4 Types of energy recording ___________________________________ 4.8-8 4.8.5 Tariff control_____________________________________________ 4.8-10 4.8.6 Formation of stored values__________________________________ 4.8-10 4.8.7 Display and readout _______________________________________ 4.8-11 4.8.8 Energy registers for primary and secondary data ________________ 4.8-12 4.9 Demand recording _________________________________________ 4.9-5 4.9.1 Survey___________________________________________________ 4.9-5 4.9.2 Available measured quantities for measured value formation _______ 4.9-6 4.9.3 Formation of demand values _________________________________ 4.9-7 4.9.4 Formation of mean value of demand___________________________ 4.9-9 4.9.5 Mean demand value for last integrating period__________________ 4.9-11 4.9.6 Maximum demand ________________________________________ 4.9-12 4.9.7 Controlling the integrating period ____________________________ 4.9-14 4.9.8 New start of integrating period ______________________________ 4.9-16 4.9.9 Demand inhibition ________________________________________ 4.9-18 4.9.10 Signal transfer ___________________________________________ 4.9-19
H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Table of contents 4.1-5
4.9.11 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.9-19 4.10 Power factors____________________________________________ 4.10-5 4.10.1 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.10-5 4.10.2 Formation of mean value during integrating period ______________ 4.10-6 4.10.3 Formation of mean value during resetting period________________ 4.10-9 4.10.4 Display and readout______________________________________ 4.10-10 4.11 Operating time registers ___________________________________ 4.11-5 4.11.1 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.11-5 4.12 Formation of billing periods (resetting)________________________ 4.12-5 4.12.1 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.12-5 4.12.2 Reset block______________________________________________ 4.12-5 4.12.3 Identification of stored values_______________________________ 4.12-6 4.12.4 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.12-6 4.13 Profiles _________________________________________________ 4.13-5 4.13.1 Event log _______________________________________________ 4.13-5 4.13.2 Load profile _____________________________________________ 4.13-8 4.13.3 Memory management ____________________________________ 4.13-13 4.14 Monitoring functions ______________________________________ 4.14-5 4.14.1 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.14-5 4.14.2 Functional principle _______________________________________ 4.14-5 4.14.3 Application possibilities for event signals ______________________ 4.14-7 4.14.4 Voltage monitoring _______________________________________ 4.14-7 4.14.5 Current monitoring _______________________________________ 4.14-8 4.14.6 Demand monitoring_______________________________________ 4.14-8 4.14.7 Power factor monitoring ___________________________________ 4.14-9 4.15 Security system __________________________________________ 4.15-5 4.15.1 Introduction _____________________________________________ 4.15-5 4.15.2 Security levels ___________________________________________ 4.15-5 4.15.3 Security attributes ________________________________________ 4.15-6 4.15.4 Security levels and their application __________________________ 4.15-7 4.15.5 Allocation of access rights to data and parameter groups _________ 4.15-9 4.16 Operating messages ______________________________________ 4.16-5 4.16.1 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.16-5 4.16.2 Recording of operating messages ____________________________ 4.16-6 4.16.3 Sending an SMS message __________________________________ 4.16-8
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.1-6 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.1-7
4 Function The method of operation of the ZMD300 and ZxD400 meters is described in separate documents in sections 4.2 to 4.16 (for document numbers refer to the relevant operating instructions (overall contents list) for the relevant meter).
4.1 Overview This chapter provides a survey of the function of ZMD300xx und ZxD400xx meters based on a block schematic diagram.
Note
ZMD and ZFD meters
The following explanations refer exclusively to meters in M circuit for three-phase three-wire networks (ZMD meters).
ZFD meters differs from ZMD meters firstly in the number of measuring elements (2 instead of 3) and secondly in the type of measurement (Aron circuit for three-phase three-wire networks). These are not specially mentioned here.
No version ZFD300xx is provided for three-phase three-wire networks.
4.1.1 Block schematic diagram
The method of operation of the meters will first be briefly explained with the aid of the block schematic diagram. Individual function blocks are described in the following chapters more fully if necessary for under-standing.
First some basic differences between the various types of meters:
• The ZMD300xT / ZxD400xT and ZMD300xR / ZxD400xR meters differ in their form of communication interfaces (modular or integrated). Two different block schematic diagrams are therefore shown below.
• Owing to the different kind of connection the current sensors for the ZMD300xx direct connection meters are shunts with series connected voltage transformers, in those of the ZxD400xx transformer connected meters internal current transformers.
• The ZMD300Ax / ZxD400Ax active energy meters record the active energy consumption imported and exported, while the ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx combimeters record the active and reactive energy consump-tion in all four quadrants.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.1-8 Function
The ZMD300xT direct connection meters and the ZxD400xT transformer connection meters can be fitted with modular communication interfaces in a communication unit, which can be exchanged or used in the field as required.
Ut
U1U2U3N
I1I2I3
Controlinputs
Measuring system
Power supply
Voltagemonitor
Memory,Load profile
Microprocessor
LCD display
Optical test outputs
Opticalinterface
Signalprocessing
Signalutilization
Tariffcontrol
Data for billing
Time switch
Display buttons
Calendar clock
Reset
Currentsensors
Voltagedividers
A/D
Extension boardOutputcontacts
Inputs/outputsRCR
(Supplementarypower supply)
Communicationunit with
interfaces and pulse inputs
Fig. 4.1.1 Block schematic diagram ZMD300xT / ZMD400xT
The ZMD300xR direct connection meters and the ZxD400xR transformer connection meters can be fitted with a maximum of one integrated communication interface (RS232, RS485 or CS) on the interface board.
Ut
U1U2U3N
I1I2I3
Controlinputs
Measuring system
Power supply
Voltagemonitor
Memory,Load profile
Microprocessor
LCD display
Opticaltest outputs
Opticalinterface
Signalprocessing
Signalutilization
Tariffcontrol
Data for billing
Time switch
Display buttons
Calendar clock
Reset
Currentsensors
Voltagedividers
A/D
Extension board
Output-contacts
Inputs/outputsRCR
(Supplementarypower supply)
Interface board with
RS232, RS485 or CS
interface Fig. 4.1.2 Block schematic diagram ZMD300xR / ZMD400xR
ZMD300xT / ZxD400xT
ZMD300xR / ZxD400xR
H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.1-9
The main inputs to the meter are:
• Connections of phase voltages (U1, U2, U3), phase currents (I1, I2, I3) and neutral conductor N
- for processing in the measuring system
- for the three-phase power supply to the meter and voltage monitor
• Control inputs Ut (3 fixed, plus up to 4 others on extension board) for:
- Changeover of energy and demand tariffs
- Resetting
- Demand inhibition
- Synchronizing
Opto-couplers protect the following circuit from interference, which could otherwise enter via the control inputs.
• Push buttons
- for display control (display buttons, optical interface)
- for resetting or service functions (reset button)
• Pulse inputs for external pulse transmitters (only for ZMD300xT / ZxD400xT group meters in the communication unit)
The meter has the following outputs:
• LCD liquid crystal display with display buttons for local reading of billing data (single 8-digit display with additional information, such as energy direction, type of energy, presence of phase voltages and identification number)
• Optical test outputs (red, 1 in active energy meters, 2 in combimeters)
• Static relay with freely parametrized signal assignment (2 fixed, plus up to 6 others on the extension board)
• Optical interface for automatic local data acquisition by suitable acquisi-tion unit (handheld terminal)
• Communication interfaces of various kinds (in the communication unit for the ZMD300xT / ZxD400xT or on the interface board in the ZMD300xR / ZxD400xR)
4.1.2 Measuring system
The input circuits (voltage dividers and current shunts with voltage transformer for the ZMD300xx direct connection meters or voltage dividers and current transformers for the ZxD400xx transformer connected meters) record voltage and current in the individual phases. Analogue-digital transformers digitize these values and feed them as instantaneous digital values via calibration stages to a signal processor.
Inputs
Outputs
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.1-10 Function
4.1.3 Signal processing
The signal processor determines the following measured quantities from the instantaneous digital values of voltage and current for each phase and forms their mean value over one second:
• Active power per phase
• Reactive power per phase (combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx only)
• Phase voltages
• Phase currents
• Mains frequency
• Phase angles
4.1.4 Signal utilization
For signal utilization in the various registers the microprocessor scans the measured quantities every second to determine the following measured values:
• Active energy (sum and individual phases, separated according to energy direction, if required in the combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx also assigned to the 4 quadrants)
• Reactive energy (only for combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx, sum and individual phases, separated according to energy direction, assigned to the 4 quadrants)
• Apparent energy (only for combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx, sum and individual phases, separated according to energy direction)
• Power factors cos ϕ (only for combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx, individual phases and mean value)
• Phase voltages
• Phase currents and neutral current
• Direction of rotating field
4.1.5 Tariff control
Tariff control is performed:
• Externally via control inputs (3 fixed, plus up to 4 others on the extension board)
• Internally by time switch and calendar clock
• Internally by the ripple control receiver for integration with the extension board
• By event signals based on threshold values of the monitoring functions
H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.1-11
4.1.6 Data preparation for billing
The following registers are available for evaluation of the individual measured values:
• 24 for energy tariffs
• 8 for total energy
• 8 for running mean demand values
• 24 for demand tariffs
• 2 for power factors cosϕ (combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx only)
• others for values of voltage and current, mains frequency and phase angles
4.1.7 Memory
A non-volatile flash memory serves to record a load profile and also contains the configuration and parametrization data of the meter and secures the billing data against loss from voltage failures.
4.1.8 Power supply
The supply voltages for the meter electronics are obtained from the three-phase network, whereby the phase voltage can vary over the entire voltage range without the supply voltage having to be adjusted. A voltage monitor ensures correct operation and reliable data recovery in the event of a voltage interruption and correct restarting when the voltage is restored.
4.1.9 Supplementary power supply
For medium or high-voltage applications in particular the measuring voltage can be switched off. Since the meter normally obtains its supply from the measuring voltage, it is similarly switched off and cannot be read. The supplementary power supply connected in parallel with the normal power supply ensures operation of the meter free from interruption, so that it can be read at any time. The supplementary power supply is situated on an extension board.
4.1.10 Extension board
The extension board is fitted inside the meter and is therefore secured by the calibration seals. It cannot be exchanged. It can contain the following components:
• up to 4 control inputs in combination with
• up to 6 output contacts (solid-state relays)
• a ripple control receiver
• a supplementary power supply
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.1-12 Function
4.1.11 Communication unit
The communication unit for fitting only in the ZMD300xT / ZxD400xT meters is a complete unit in its own case. If present, it is situated under the front door, is therefore secured by a company seal and can be exchanged or inserted in the field if necessary. It contains:
• Communication interfaces as required for remote scanning of the meter (e.g. CS, RS232, RS485, modem)
• 2 signal inputs (S0 interfaces) for processing external pulse transmitters
4.1.12 Interface board
The interface board only present in the ZMD300xR / ZxD400xR meters is permanently fitted in the meter and therefore secured with the calibration seal. Depending on the version, it contains
• an RS232 interface,
• an RS485 interface or
• a CS interface
H 71 0200 0023 c en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL
4.2 Measuring unit
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.2-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 26.07.1999 First edition − 17.04.2000 Front page and revision history added a 29.09.2000 Several changes b 18.04.2002 Terminology revision c 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrTable of contents 4.2-3
Table of contents
4.2 Measuring unit ____________________________________________ 4.2-5 4.2.1 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.2-5 4.2.2 Signal conversion and processing _____________________________ 4.2-7 4.2.3 Formation of measured quantities_____________________________ 4.2-9
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.2-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.2-5
4.2 Measuring unit This sub-chapter explains all functions of the measuring unit in detail, i.e. the generation from the analogue input signals of all digital measured quantities required in the meter.
Note
ZMD and ZFD meters
The following explanations refer − unless otherwise mentioned − exclu-sively to meters in M circuit for three-phase three-wire networks (ZMD meters).
ZFD meters differs from ZMD meters firstly in the number of measuring elements (2 instead of 3) and secondly in the type of measurement (Aron circuit for three-phase three-wire networks). These are not specially mentioned here.
No version ZFD300xx is provided for three-phase three-wire networks.
4.2.1 Survey
A / D Signalprocessor
Micro-processor
analogueinputsignals
instantaneousdigitalvalues
Measuredquantities
Ix, Uxix, ux Ix, Ux,
Px, Qx, etc.±A, ±R, etc.
digitalmean values
Fig. 4.2.1 Block schematic diagram of measuring unit
The meter has the analogue current values I1, I2 and I3 and analogue voltage values U1, U2 and U3 available as input signals. The meter measuring system generates calibrated instantaneous digital values of voltage and current for each phase from the analogue input signals. The signal processor of the meter determines the following digital mean values (averaged for one second in each case) from the instantaneous values of voltage and current in each phase:
• Active powers P1, P2 and P3 (with sign for direction of energy)
• Reactive powers Q1, Q2 and Q3 (with sign for direction of energy, only in combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx)
• Phase voltages U1, U2, U3
• Phase currents I1, I2, I3, neutral current I0
• Phase angles between voltages U1 and U2 as well as U1 and U3
• Phase angles between voltage U1 and currents I1, I2 and I3
• Mains frequency fn
Input signals
Signal conversion
Signal preparation
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.2-6 Function
The microprocessor calculates the following measured quantities from the mean values provided by the signal processor:
Measured quantity ZMD300Cx ZMD400Cx
ZFD400Cx ZMD300Ax ZMD400Ax
ZFD400Ax
Active power import +A Sum / Phases Sum Sum / Phases Sum
Active power export –A Sum / Phases Sum Sum / Phases Sum
Reactive power positive +R Sum / Phases Sum – –
Reactive power negative –R Sum / Phases Sum – –
Reactive power 1st quadrant +Ri Sum / Phases Sum – –
Reactive power 2nd quadrant –Rc Sum / Phases Sum – –
Reactive power 3rd quadrant –Ri Sum / Phases Sum – –
Reactive power 4th quadrant +Rc Sum / Phases Sum – –
Apparent power import +VA Sum / Phases Sum – –
Apparent power export –VA Sum / Phases Sum – –
Power factor cosϕ Phases / mean value Mean value – –
Phase voltages U1 - U2 - U3 U12 - U32 U1 - U2 - U3 U12 - U32
Phase currents I1 - I2 - I3 I1 - I3 I1 - I2 - I3 I1 - I3
Neutral current I0 – I0 –
Mains frequency fn yes yes yes yes
Phase angle voltages ϕ U U1 - U2 / U1 - U3 – U1 - U2 / U1 - U3 –
Phase angle voltage-current ϕ U-I yes – yes –
Direction of rotating field yes yes yes yes
Owing to the different type of measurement of the Aron circuit, data for the individual phases in the ZFD400xx are specifically not provided. The following diagrams show the differences between the ZMD400xx and the ZFD400xx.
L1L2L3
L3
L1
L2
U1
U3
I1
I3
N
I2U2
Fig. 4.2.2 Type of measurement ZMD400xx
Since the ZMD400xx measures the individual phases mutually independently with one measuring element each, it can record the sum of the three phases, the individual phases themselves, the phase angle between voltage and current as well as the angle between voltages U1 - U2 and U1 - U3.
Signal processing
ZMD400xx
H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.2-7
L1L2L3
cos ϕ = 1
L3
L1
L2
U12
U32
I1
I3 Fig. 4.2.3 Type of measurement ZFD400xx
The ZFD400xx with Aron circuit records with its two measuring elements a phase current I1 or I3 each, together with the corresponding linked voltage U12 or U32. It cannot therefore form any actual single-phase values. In addition, the phase angles between voltage and current always have an additional angle of 30° and are therefore not representative.
No version ZFD300xx is provided for three-phase three-wire networks.
4.2.2 Signal conversion and processing
Ux
Ix
Px
(Qx)
Ux
Ix
analogueinput signals
digitalvalues
Digitalfilter
Calibra-tion i
A / DConverter
Digitalfilter
Calibra-tion u
I 2
U 2
p = u i
q = u i.
.
*
tn
i
u
u, i : calibrated instantaneous values of voltage and current
p : instantaneous active power
q : instantaneous reactive power
u : voltage displaced 90* o
tn : zero passage times
A / DConverter
Form
atio
n of
mea
n va
lues
per
sec
ond
ϕ Uϕ U-Ifn
Fig. 4.2.4 Principle of signal processor
There is no calculation of reactive power Q by the ZMD300Ax / ZxD400Ax active energy meters. High resistance voltage dividers reduce the voltages U1, U2 and U3 (58 to 240 V) applied to the meter to a proportionate amount of a few mV (UU) for further processing.
In the ZMD300xx meters for direct connection the phase currents pass through a high precision resistor in the current loop. The following voltage transformer forms voltages proportional to the input currents likewise of several mV (UI) and simultaneously separates the measuring circuit from the meter electronics. This voltage transformer is also insensitive to direct currents up to 100 A.
In the ZxD400xx meters for transformer connection internal current transformers reduce the input currents I1, I2 and I3 to the meter (0 to 10 A) for further processing. The secondary currents of these current transformers develop voltages proportional to the input currents across resistors, also of a few mV (UI).
ZFD400xx
Input circuits
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.2-8 Function
The analogue signals UU and UI are digitized in analogue-digital converters and then filtered. A following calibration stage compensates for the natural errors of the voltage divider or current transformer, so that no further adjustment is necessary in the subsequent processing.
Calibrated digital instantaneous values of voltage (u) and current (i) for all three phases are then available as intermediate values for the formation of the required values in the signal processor. The instantaneous value of active power p is produced by multiplying the instantaneous values of voltage u and current i (the active component cor-responds to the product of voltage component with the current component parallel to the voltage).
ϕ
U
I
IP
IQ
P = U I cos. . ϕQ = U I sin . . ϕ
Calculation per phase of
Fig. 4.2.5 Power calculation
For the instantaneous value of reactive power q (only formed by the ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx combimeters) the instantaneous value of voltage u must be rotated through 90° before multiplication (the reactive component is the product of the voltage component with the current component vertical to the voltage).
The squares of voltage and current are obtained by multiplying the instan-taneous values of voltage and current by themselves. The values U and I are obtained from these by extracting the root. The mains frequency can be calculated from the time measured between two zero passages (change from negative to positive value of voltage U1). The times between zero passage of the phase voltage U1 and those of the other phase voltages U2 and U3 serves to determine the phase angle be-tween the voltages and of the rotating field.
U1 U2 U3
1 : TU1-U2
2 : TU1-U3
3 : T (fn)12 3
Time measurementfor rotating field,frequency, phase angle
U1-U1
Fig. 4.2.6 Time measurement
The phase angle between voltage and current is determined by the times between zero passage of the phase voltage U1 and those of the phase currents I1, I2 and I3. The signal processor works at a high clock frequency in the kHz range. For further processing of the individual signal it generates mean values over one second, which the following microprocessor scans at intervals of one second.
Digitizing
Power calculation
Time measurement
Mean value formation
H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.2-9
4.2.3 Formation of measured quantities
By scanning the mean values of active P and in combimeters also reactive Q powers every second, energy components are produced (Ws or vars) at fixed intervals (every second) and with varying energy magnitudes or demand. These energy components are scaled by the microprocessor corresponding to the meter constant and are then available as measured quantities for selection of measured value. The measured values are fed directly to the following registers to record the energy and the maximum demand (in combimeters also of minimum power factor). The active powers in the individual phases ±A1, ±A2 and ±A3 are formed directly from the mean values of active power P1, P2 and P3.
By summating the mean values of active power P1, P2 and P3 the micro-processor calculates the total active power import +A or the total active power export -A.
Measured quantitiesMean values per second
ΣP1
P3
P2+A (Import)
-A (Export)
Fig. 4.2.7 Total active power
The reactive power values of the individual phases ±R1, ±R2 and ±R3 are obtained in the combimeters directly from the mean values of reactive power Q1, Q2 and Q3.
By summating the mean values of reactive power Q1, Q2 and Q3, the microprocessor calculates the total positive reactive power +R or the total negative reactive power -R.
Measured quantitiesMean values per second
ΣQ1
Q3
Q2+R
-R
Fig. 4.2.8 Total reactive power
The microprocessor can allocate the reactive power to the 4 quadrants in the combimeters from the signs of R and A:
• Reactive power in 1st quadrant: +Ri
• Reactive power in 2nd quadrant: +Rc
• Reactive power in 3rd quadrant: -Ri
• Reactive power in 4th quadrant: -Rc
In the same way he can allocate the reactive powers of the individual phases to the 4 quadrants.
Active power
Reactive power
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.2-10 Function
+R
+ kWh
Export Import
- kWh
-R
+Ri+Rc
-Rc-Ri
+A-A
- kvarh - kvarh
+ kvarh+ kvarh
Quadrant II Quadrant I
Quadrant IVQuadrant III
Fig. 4.2.9 4-quadrant measurement
The quadrants are numbered from top right as 1st quadrant (+A/+Ri) anti-clockwise to the 4th quadrant (+A/-Rc) at bottom right. The apparent power is calculated in the combimeters in two ways:
• by geometric addition of the active and reactive power of the individual phases
• by multiplying the rms values of voltage and current of the individual phases
The method of calculation can be parametrized (only one possible in each case). From the mean values P1, P2 and P3 and Q1, Q2 and Q3 the microproc-essor calculates the apparent power of the individual phases ±VA1, ±VA2 and ±VA3 as well as the total apparent power ±VA.
Measured quantitiesMean valuesper second
ΣP1
P3
P2
+VA (import)
-VA (export)
ΣQ1
Q3
Q2
(P1 + P2 + P3) + (Q1 + Q2 + Q3)22
(Q1 + Q2 + Q3)
(P1 + P2 + P3)
Fig. 4.2.10 Total apparent power according to calculation type 1
Apparent power
Calculation method 1 (vectorial addition)
H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.2-11
From the mean values U1rms, U2rms, U3rms and I1rms, I2rms, I3rms the micro-processor calculates by multiplication the apparent power of the individual phases ±VA1, ±VA2 and ±VA3 and summates these for the total apparent power ±VA.
Measured quantitiesMean valuesper second
+VA (Import)
–VA (Export)
Σ
VA1I1 U1rms rms
.
I1 rms
U1rms
VA2I2 U2rms rms
I2rms
U2 rms
VA3I3 U3rms rms
I3rms
U3 rms
.
.
Fig. 4.2.11 Total apparent power according to calculation type 2
(ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx only) The power factor cosϕ is calculated bei den Kombizählern as follows:
SPcos =ϕ
The meter uses the method of calculation employed for calculating the apparent power. The rms values of the voltages U1rms, U2rms and U3rms are obtained from the mean values of the squares of the voltages by extracting the root and directly from these the phase voltages U1, U2 and U3. The rms values of the currents I1rms, I2rms and I3rms are obtained from the mean values of the squares of the currents by extracting the root and directly from these the phase currents I1, I2 and I3. The signal processor calculates the instantaneous neutral current i0 by adding the instantaneous phase currents i1, i2 and i3.
i1 i2
i3
i0
i0 = i1 + i2 + i3(geometrical addition)
Fig. 4.2.12 Neutral current I0 The signal processor calculates the mains frequency fn by forming the reciprocal from the time tU1-U1 between two zero passages of voltage U1.
Calculation method 2 (from rms values)
Power factor cosϕ
Phase voltages
Phase currents
Neutral current
Mains frequency
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.2-12 Function
The signal processor calculates the phase angles between voltages U1-U2 and U1-U3 from the times tU1-U1, tU1-U2 and tU1-U3 between zero passages of the various voltages.
The signal processor calculates the phase angle between voltage U1 and current per phase from the times tU1-I1, tU1-I2 and tU1-I3 between zero pas-sages of the voltage U1 and the phase currents.
2 forms of representation are available for displaying the phase angle. These can be selected by parametrizing.
Case 1: All voltage and current angles are displayed clockwise with reference to the voltage in phase 1. The values of the angles are always positive and can be from 0 to 360°.
U1
U3
U2
I2 I1
I3
I1
U2 (120°)
I2
U3 (240°) I3
Fig. 4.2.13 Phase angle case 1
Case 2: The voltage angles are displayed as in case 1. The angles of the currents are displayed, however, with reference to the associated phase voltage and can have values between -180° and +180°.
U1
U3
U2
I2 I1
I3
U1-I1
U2 (120°) U2-I2
U3 (240°)
U3-I3
Fig. 4.2.14 Phase angle case 2 The direction of the rotating field is calculated by the microprocessor based on the phase angle of the 3 voltages. If the direction of rotation corresponds to that specified by the parametrizing, the phase voltage indications L1, L2 and L3 are continuously lit. Otherwise they flash every second.
Phase angles
Direction of rotating field
H 71 0200 0036 f en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL
4.3 Inputs and outputs
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.3-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 26.07.1999 First edition a 17.04.2000 Text adaptations after internal revision b 29.09.2000 Several changes c 18.04.2002 ZxD210AT replaced with ZxD410AT; extension board 600x with 6
control inputs cancelled d 22.04.2002 Chapter 6.5 additionally e 02.05.2002 ZMD310AT included f 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrTable of contents 4.3-3
Table of contents
4.3 Inputs and outputs_________________________________________ 4.3-5 4.3.1 Terminal layout ___________________________________________ 4.3-5 4.3.2 Parametrizing the terminal designations ________________________ 4.3-6 4.3.3 Terminal designations ______________________________________ 4.3-7 4.3.4 Further inputs and outputs _________________________________ 4.3-11
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.3-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.3-5
4.3 Inputs and outputs This sub-chapter describes all inputs and outputs of ZMD300xx and ZxD400xx meters and provides instructions for the definition of terminal functions and terminal labelling.
4.3.1 Terminal layout
The terminals are arranged as shown as seen from below in the various types of meter. The functions of the terminals are likewise shown on the drawings.
ZMD300xT
Voltage outputs(Terminals T0-x)
Control inputs andoutput contacts
Inputs and/oroutput contacts ofextension board(Terminals T1-x)
Pulseinputs
Communicationinterfaces
Communication unit (Terminals T2-x)
L1 L2 L3 N
Phase connections
U1 U2 U3 N
Fig. 4.3.1 Terminal arrangement for ZMD300xT meter for direct connection with
modular communication (exchangeable communication unit, example CU-A1)
ZMD300xR
Voltage outputs(Terminals T0-x)
Control inputs andoutput contacts
Inputs and/oroutput contacts of extension board(Terminals T1-x)
L1 L2 L3 N
Phase connections
U1 U2 U3 N
Interface board (Terminals T2-x)Communicationinterface
Fig. 4.3.2 Terminal arrangement for ZMD300xR meter for direct connection with
permanently integrated communication (interface board)
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.3-6 Function
ZxD400xT
Voltage connectionsCurrent connections
I1 I1 I2 I2 I3 I3U1
U1 U2
U2
U3
U3 N
NVoltage outputs(Terminals T0-x)
Control inputs andoutput contacts
Inputs and/oroutput contacts ofextension board(Terminals T1-x)
Pulseinputs
Communicationinterfaces
Communication unit (Terminals T2-x)
Fig. 4.3.3 Terminal arrangement for ZMD400xT meter for transformer connection with modular communication (exchangeable communication unit)
ZxD400xR
Voltage connectionsCurrent connections
I1 I1 I2 I2 I3 I3U1
U1 U2
U2
U3
U3 N
NVoltage outputs(Terminals T0-x)
Control inputs andoutput contacts
Inputs and/oroutput contacts ofextension board(Terminals T1-x)
Communicationinterface
Interface board (Terminals T2-x)
Fig. 4.3.4 Terminal arrangement for ZMD400xR meter for transformer
connection with permanently integrated communication (interface board)
4.3.2 Parametrizing the terminal designations
Definitions for the terminal designations are required for all terminals available in the Landis+Gyr MAP190 meter specification and parametrizing software, i.e. a terminal number must be defined for every terminal, which is then printed at the relevant terminal during the equipment manufacturing process.
In the Landis+Gyr MAP190 meter specification and parametrizing software the terminals are provided with the following symbolic designation:
• T0-1 to T0-n for terminals of the basic version
• T1-1 to T1-n for terminals of the extension board
H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.3-7
• T2-1 to T2-n for terminals of the communication unit or interface board
These symbolic designations must be supplemented when parametrized, where permitted, with the relevant terminal designations required by the customer.
Terminal designations are always numerical with a maximum of 2 digits. The table below shows typical terminal designations for the input terminals as used according to VDEW/DIN or selected by Landis+Gyr.
Function Landis+Gyr VDEW / DIN
Common connection G 40 15
Energy tariff input E1 41 13
Energy tariff input E2 42 33
Energy tariff input E3 49 not defined
Integration period control mB 45 17
Time-of-day synchronization Synch 15 50 16
Reset control KA 43 18
Reset control KB 44 19
S0-input S0 1+ 20 20
S0-input S0 1- 21 21
S0-input S0 2+ 22 22
S0-input S0 2- 23 23
Demand tariff input P1 46 14
Demand tariff input P2 47 34
Demand tariff input P3 48 not defined
There is no standardization for the assignment and designation of the output contacts.
4.3.3 Terminal designations
It should be noted for the current and voltage connections that terminal designations for the actual connection terminals for current and voltage (numbers 1 - 11) are engraved on the terminal block and cannot be altered. Individual terminal designations are possible exclusively for the screwless spring-loaded terminals.
In the following connection diagrams the terminals for which the designations can be changed are shaded.
Standardization
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.3-8 Function
ZFD400xx
2
T0-1
T0-2
7 93 5 81
T0-3
T0-4
T0-5
T0-6
Fig. 4.3.5 Connection diagram of measuring unit for ZFD400xx with
unchangeable terminal designations 1 to 9 and the changeable terminal designations T0-1 to T0-6
ZMD400xx
2
T0-1
T0-2
4 7 9 11
T0-6
3 5 6 8
T0-5
1
T0-3
T0-4
Fig. 4.3.6 Connection diagram of measuring unit for ZMD400xx with
unchangeable terminal designations 1 to 11 and the changeable terminal designations T0-1 to T0-6
ZMD300xx
1
T0-1
T0-2
4 7 9 10
T0-6
123
T0-3
6
T0-4
T0-5
Fig. 4.3.7 Connection diagram of measuring unit for ZMD300xx with
unchangeable terminal designations 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10 and 12 and the changeable terminal designations T0-1 to T0-6
H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.3-9
T0-10
T0-9
G E1 P1 mB
T0-11
T0-12
K1Basic version:
3 control inputs
2 output contacts (solid-state relays)
Signal allocation for free parametrization
T0-13
K2
T0-7
T0-8
Fig. 4.3.8 Example of a connection diagram for control inputs and output
contacts of basic version
4200
G KA KB
Extension board 4200
4 control inputs
2 output contacts (solid-state relays)
Signal allocationfor free parametrization
G E2 P2
T1-4
T1-1
T1-2
T1-3
T1-5
T1-6
T1-7
K3 K4
T1-8
T1-9
T1-10
Fig. 4.3.9 Example of a connection diagram for the 4200 extension board
2400
G KA KB
Extension board 2400
2 control inputs
4 output contacts (solid-state relays)
Signal allocation for free parametrizationT1
-4T1-1
T1-2
T1-3
K5 K6
T1-8
T1-9
T1-10
K3 K4
T1-5
T1-7
T1-6
Fig. 4.3.10 Example of a connection diagram for the 2400 extension board
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.3-10 Function
0600 Extension board 0600
No control inputs
6 output contacts (solid-state relays)
Signal allocation for free parametrization
K5 K6
T1-5
T1-6
T1-7
K3 K4
T1-2
T1-3
T1-4
K7 K8
T1-8
T1-9
T1-10
T1-1 Fig. 4.3.11 Example of a connection diagram for the 0600 extension board
0250
Extension board 0250
No control inputs
2 output contacts (solid-state relays)
Signal allocation for free parametrization
T1-3
T1-4
T1-2
K3 K4
T1-5
T1-6
T1-7
T1-1
With supplementary power supply
Fig. 4.3.12 Example of a connection diagram for the 0250 extension board
0030 Extension board 0030
No control inputs
No output contacts
Signal allocationfor free parametrization
T1-1
With ripple controlreceiver
E
Fig. 4.3.13 Example of a connection diagram for the 0030 extension board
0430
Extension board 0430
No control inputs4 output contacts (solid-state relays)Signal allocationfor free parametrization
T1-1
T1-2
K5 K6
T1-6
T1-7
T1-8
K3 K4
T1-3
T1-4
T1-5
With ripple controlreceiver
E
Fig. 4.3.14 Example of a connection diagram for the 0430 extension board
H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.3-11
CU-xx
2 pulse inputs (S0 interface)
RS232 and CS interface for remote meterreading
+ - + -
T2-4
T2-1
T2-2
T2-3
S01 S02
DCDC
DCDC
RS232+ -
2 3 4 5TD
RDGNDGND
CS
2 3 4 5
+ -
T2-5 T2-6
Communication unit CU-A1
Fig. 4.3.15 Connection diagram of a communication unit (example CU-A1)
The interface boards c1 (RS232) and c2 (RS484) are permanently labelled on the plug. No terminal designation must be parametrized.
c3
CS interface for remote meterreading
+ -
T2-3
T2-4
CS Interface board c3
Fig. 4.3.16 Connection diagram of interface board c3
4.3.4 Further inputs and outputs
Further meter inputs and outputs are the optical interface (see 6 "Communication interfaces") and the optical test outputs (see 5 "Control elements and displays" and 8 "Maintenance and service)".
c1, c2
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.3-12 Function
H 71 0200 0243 - en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL
4.4 Calendar clock
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0243 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.4-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 31.03.2003 First edition
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0243 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrTable of contents 4.4-3
Table of contents
4.4 Calendar clock ____________________________________________ 4.4-5 4.4.1 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.4-5 4.4.2 Summer/winter time _______________________________________ 4.4-5 4.4.3 Time elements ____________________________________________ 4.4-5 4.4.4 Time base________________________________________________ 4.4-6 4.4.5 Power reserve ____________________________________________ 4.4-6 4.4.6 Changing the date and time _________________________________ 4.4-6 4.4.7 Synchronizing by the external synchronization signal______________ 4.4-6 4.4.8 Synchronizing via communication interface _____________________ 4.4-8 4.4.9 Meter behaviour with time deviations __________________________ 4.4-8 4.4.10 Display and readout _______________________________________ 4.4-10
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0243 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.4-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0243 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.4-5
4.4 Calendar clock This sub-chapter explains the functions of the calendar clock.
4.4.1 Survey
The meters ZMD300xxx / ZxD400xx are always fitted with a calendar clock (Time of Use). The tariff sections T24 and T44 are also fitted with a time switch, which uses the calendar clock as a time-base and performs the tariff control with the associated switching tables (see chapter 4.5 "Time switch").
Calendar clock
Internal reset
Internal integrating period
Mains frequency50/60 Hz
Quartz
Integratingperiod
synchronous integrating period
Synchronizinginput SYNC
Date and time forPmax, resets, controlof time switch, etc.
Fig. 4.4.1 Block schematic diagram for calendar clock
The calendar clock has the following functions:
• Formation of date and time (can be synchronized by external SYNC control signal) from internal quartz oscillator (can be synchronized with mains frequency)
• Formation of integrating period (1 to 60 minutes) – likewise from internal quartz (can be synchronized with time-of-day)
• Resetting – if controlled internally
• Provision of date and time for various events
4.4.2 Summer/winter time
The start and finish of a summer season can be defined with freely para-metrized times. The time shift can be ±120 minutes.
4.4.3 Time elements
The time function provides the following time elements (range in parentheses):
• Year (0000 ... 9999)
• Month (01 ... 12)
• Calendar days (01 ... 31)
• Weekdays (1 ... 7, where 1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, etc.)
• Hours (00 ... 23)
• Minutes (00 ... 59)
• Seconds (00 ... 59)
The calendar clock takes account of leap years until 2100.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0243 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.4-6 Function
4.4.4 Time base
The internal quartz oscillator, which with < 0.5 second deviation per day (< 5 ppm) is of very high accuracy, serves as time-base. Its temperature stability of < 0.1 s per K is also very high.
The quartz frequency can be tuned to the mains frequency of 50 or 60 Hz if necessary, provided this is sufficiently accurate. Tuning is performed after every full wave of the mains frequency, i.e. after 20 ms at 50 Hz or after 16.67 ms at 60 Hz. The meter monitors the fluctuation of the mains frequency from the quartz frequency. If this is greater than 5 %, it automatically switches off the tuning of the quartz frequency to the mains frequency.
4.4.5 Power reserve
With an interruption in the voltage, Supercaps (capacitors of very high capacitance) ensure that the calendar clock continues for a few days. The power supply company can use a battery in the meter as a supply during longer interruptions.
The power reserve is at least 15 days without battery and around 10 years with battery. When the power reserve expires
• the date is set to 1.1.2000
• an error message is given
Depending on the parametrizing the expired power reserve is indicated by a flashing arrow on the display.
4.4.6 Changing the date and time
The date and time of the calendar clock can be changed as follows:
• manually in setting mode, called up via the service menu
• via the communication interfaces
• via the integrated ripple control receiver
• via the control inputs
4.4.7 Synchronizing by the external synchronization signal
The calendar clock can be synchronized by an external master clock (e.g. the central station), which sends synchronization pulses at regular intervals. This is of particular importance if the meter is to record load profiles.
There are two possibilities of synchronizing the calendar clock using the external synchronization pulses:
• Several times per day
• Once per day
Note
Selected application of method of synchronizing
Only one type of synchronization can be used at a time, either several times per day or once per day.
H 71 0200 0243 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.4-7
Two synchronizing intervals are available: the integrating period or full minutes. In the first case, synchronizing takes place at the start of the next or end of the last integrating period, in the second case on the full minute. The synchronization interval is defined by parameter setting.
Synchronization interval e.g. 15 min
> 2 s
< 100 ms bounce-free
Fig. 4.4.2 Synchronization interval
Since the synchronization signal is transmitted at regular intervals (e.g. 00:00h, 00:15h, 00:30h etc) it carries a time information. When, for instance, the meter receives the third synchronization signal of the day (00:30h) the calendar clock is synchronized to 00:30h. The reaction of the meter to the synchronization signal depends on the detected deviation (see 4.4.9 "Meter behaviour with time deviations").
The meter will accept the synchronization pulse any time but only once within one capture period. It is therefore recommended to set the synchronization interval identical to the capture period.
Note
Ignoring synchronization pulses
A second synchronization pulse within the same integrating period will be ignored.
With the daily synchronization, the meter allows one time window per day within which the synchronization pulse must be sent to the meter. The time of the day (e.g. 22:00h) and the width (e.g. one minute) of the window can be defined by parameter setting.
00:00 Uhr 24:00 Uhr
Daily synchronizationtime window
Daily synchronization pulse
Fig. 4.4.3 Synchronization time window
If the "time of the day" parameter is set to 22:00h and the meter receives a synchronization signal within the defined window, the meter is synchronized to 22:00h. The reaction of the meter to the synchronization signal depends on the deviation (see 4.4.9 "Meter behaviour with time deviations").
The meter will not accept a synchronization pulse outside the time window and the signal will therefore have no effect.
Several times per day
Once per day
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0243 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.4-8 Function
4.4.8 Synchronizing via communication interface
The calendar clock can be synchronized by the central station, which sends the time information to the meter via the selected communication interface.
The time information received from the central station is compared with the local time of the meter. The reaction of the meter to the time information depends on the deviation (see 4.4.9 "Meter behaviour with time deviations").
The time can be set as often as required but only once per integrating period.
Note
Setting time and new start of integrating period
If the time is synchronized a second time within the same integrating period, the integrating period is reset no matter how small the deviation.
This is to prevent multiple synchronization with a small time shift resulting in a large time shift that, if made in one single approach, would have resetthe integrating period.
4.4.9 Meter behaviour with time deviations
Depending on the time deviation of the internal clock from the external master clock, the synchronization has different effects on the calendar clock. The following cases are possible:
• the time deviation is smaller than 1 second
• the time deviation is between 1 second and 2 to 9 seconds (depending on parameter setting)
• the time deviation is greater than 2 to 9 seconds (depending on para-meter setting)
no effect
integrating periodreset
time shift
0 s 1 s 2...9 s Time deviation
Fig. 4.4.4 Meter behaviour with time deviations If the difference between the internal clock and the master clock is smaller than one second, no correction is made to the time. The deviation is cumulated and will be corrected as soon as it exceeds one second. If the difference between the internal clock and the master clock is between one second and a maximum of nine seconds, the time is advanced or set back by the corresponding number of seconds. Advancing or setting back the clock is only allowed once per capture period. The remaining deviation (fraction of a second) is cumulated and will be corrected as soon as it exceeds one second. The integrating period is shortened or elongated by the number of seconds of the time shift.
Smaller than 1 second
Between 1 second and 2 to 9 seconds
H 71 0200 0243 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.4-9
If the difference between the internal clock and the master clock is greater than 2 to 9 seconds, the time for the calendar clock is set to the time transmitted by the master clock. A time setting always causes interruption of the present integrating period and the start of a new period. A reduced integrating period therefore results when setting the time on the integrating period grid. When setting to a time within the integrating period (possible with synchronizing signal to the full minute or with synchronization via the communication unit) two reduced integrating periods are produced. Load profile entries for reduced integrating periods are identified by a corresponding status entry and declared invalid. In the example below, the synchronization interval and the integrating period has been set to 15 minutes.
If, for instance, the meter receives the synchronization pulse at 22 minutes past the hour, the clock is set back to 15 minutes past the hour i.e. to the start time of the integrating period. The aborted integrating period is declared as invalid and a new integrating period will immediately be initiated i.e. 15 minutes past the hour.
..:00:00..:59:59
..:30:00 ..:29:59
..:15:00
..:14:59..:45:00
..:44:59
to ..:
07:3
0
from ..
:07:
31
to ..:
37:3
0
from ..
:37:
31to ..:22:30
from ..:22:31
to ..:52:30
from ..:52:31
Fig. 4.4.5 Meter behaviour dependent on time of arrival of synchronizing pulse
If the meter receives the synchronization pulse at 23 minutes past the hour, the clock is advanced to 29 minutes and 59 seconds past the hour i.e. to the end of the capture period. The remaining second of the capture period is used to communicate and save all relevant data. The aborted (shortened) capture period is declared as invalid and a new capture period will be initiated at 30 minutes past the hour.
Greater than 2 to 9 seconds
Example
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0243 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.4-10 Function
4.4.10 Display and readout
The following calendar clock values are available for display and readout depending on the parametrization:
• current time-of-day
• current date
• day of week
• status of calendar clock (only readable with DLMS) Some examples are given below of calendar clock displays. The identifi-cation figures for the individual data correspond to the energy data identification system OBIS (see 5.2.3 "Identification number system").
current time-of-day (1)
0: general data
9: time data
current date (2)
11 May 2000
Values available
Display examples
H 71 0200 0029 c en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL
4.5 Time switch
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0029 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.5-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 26.07.1999 First edition − 17.04.2000 Text adaptations after internal revision a 29.09.2000 Changes on pages 4 to 7 b 28.02.2002 New designation of time switch signals. Displays updated. c 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0029 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrTable of contents 4.5-3
Table of contents
4.5 Time switch ______________________________________________ 4.5-5 4.5.1 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.5-5 4.5.2 Determination of the valid day table ___________________________ 4.5-6 4.5.3 Changeover to a new switching program _______________________ 4.5-7
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0029 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.5-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0029 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.5-5
4.5 Time switch This sub-chapter explains the functions of the time switch.
4.5.1 Survey
The time switch permits autonomous tariff control of the meter. It uses the calendar clock (see chapter 4.4) as time base and with the current day table at the desired time controls
• the tariff changeover (energy and demand tariffs)
• a maximum of 8 output relays
• suppression or release of event signals
The time switch is only fitted in meters with tariff section T24 or T44. With every change of date, i.e. at midnight, the time switch determines with the aid of various tables which day table is valid for the next day (see 4.5.2). The power supply company can define up to 8 different day tables and therefore determine the required tariff structure for the relevant type of day.
Each day table contains the following information:
• Number of table (1 to 8)
• Max. 10 time inputs (time-of-day in hours and minutes) with status data ("1" for active, "0" for inactive) for the 16 time switch signals. The signal statuses entered apply in each case from midnight to midnight between the specified times-of-day.
Day table No. X Time switch signals
TOU
-E1
TOU
-E2
valid
00:00
TOU
-E3
TOU
-E4
TOU
-E5
TOU
-E6
TOU
-P1
TOU
-P2
TOU
-P3
TOU
-P4
TOU
-P5
TOU
-P6
TOU
-K1
TOU
-K2
TOU
-K3
TOU
-Sp
from: to:
Fig. 4.5.1 Day table
The 16 time switch have specific designations. Their assignment to the functions is basically free, but the following assignments are recommended:
• TOU-E1 to TOU-E6 for energy registers ERx, with parallel control also for demand registers
• TOU-P1 to TOU-P6 for demand registers MDRx, if independent of the energy registers and with demand inhibition B
• TOU-K1 to TOU-K3 for passing on control signals to external devices via output contacts
• TOU-Sp(ecial) for a control signal independent of the remaining control signals also for passing on to external devices
Day tables
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0029 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.5-6 Function
The control signals generated corresponding to the day table effective can either be linked to control signals CS1 to CS16 via the AND and OR matrix or used directly as control signals (see 4.7 "Tariff control"). They can also be fed out via relays to external devices.
4.5.2 Determination of the valid day table
The day table effective on a specific date is defined in the time switch with the aid of two further control tables:
• The season table defines the day table effective in each case for each day from Monday to Sunday for a maximum of 12 time periods.
• The exception days table defines day tables deviating from the normal sequence, e.g. bank holidays, vacation, etc. The exception day table can contain up to 100 entries.
Calendar clockTime/date
Exception daystable
valid atDaytable
up to 100 entries
valid
Day table No. 1Time switch signals
up to 10 entries
Tariff control / control table
up to 8 day tablesno exception day
Exception day
from to
TOU
-E1
TOU
-E2
TOU
-E3
TOU
-Sp
etc.
to valid
from to
Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su
up to 12 entries
Season table
Fig. 4.5.2 Sequence to determine day table effective
Following every change of date, the date is compared with the entries in the exception days table. If the date is included in the table, it is an exception day and the day table specified is used for the control. Otherwise the season table is checked in order to determine the valid day table. The season table defines the day table effective in each case for each day from Monday to Sunday for up to 12 date periods. The power supply company can therefore take account of seasonal variations for the tariff control. The season table contains no year figure and is therefore run through repetitively.
In the very simplest case the season table contains a single entry with starting date 1.1. and end date 31.12., which is therefore valid for the whole year.
Every entry in the season table defines the day table effective in each case from Monday to Sunday for the corresponding time period. In the simplest case the season table contains the same day table number for every weekday and which is therefore valid for the whole week.
Season table
H 71 0200 0029 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.5-7
The power supply company can also specify different day tables for the individual weekdays (differing day tables for weekdays and the weekend are often encountered). All day dates are recorded in the exception days table on which a different control program should be used from normal operation, together with the number of the day table then effective.
If the exception day has the same date every year, e.g. the Swiss national holiday on 1 August, only the day and month have to be entered in the exception days table. The entry is then valid for an indefinite time.
If the exception day has a different date every year, however, such as Easter, a separate entry is necessary for every year. The year must also be entered in addition to the day and month. The table can therefore cover a long period of time.
4.5.3 Changeover to a new switching program
The power supply company can parametrize a second switching program in the meter (passive switching table) with identification number and changeover date, on which the season and day tables of the previous switching program can be overwritten with the data of new tables (the exception days table remains effective unchanged).
Calendar clockTime/date
Exception daystable
DateDaytable
Season table
valid from ... to
Mo to SuDay table
Day table 1 to 8Time switch signals
TimeTOU-E1 to TOU-Sp
no exception day
Exception day
Changeover dateDay Month Year
Tariff control / control table
Season table new
validfrom ... to
Mo to SuDay table
Day table 1 to 8 newTime switch signals
TimeTOU-E1 to TOU-Sp
Fig. 4.5.3 Before changeover to a new switching program
This permits the power supply company to fit all meters installed with a new switching program before this changeover date, which is applicable to all meters simultaneously from this date.
The time switch operates with the previous switching table until the specified changeover date. The new switching table becomes effective with change of date to the specified changeover date. The previous switching program is then irrevocably overwritten and is no longer available.
Every switching table can be given an identification number to identify it clearly. The identification number can be displayed and read out. In addition, the changeover date on the new switching table and the date on which the currently active switching table was activated can be displayed and read out.
Exception days table
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0029 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.5-8 Function
Calendar clockTime/date
Exception daystable
DateDaytable
Season table new
valid from ... to
Mo to SuDay table
Day table1 to 8 newTime switch signals
TimeTOU-E1 to TOU-Sp
no exception day
Exception day
Tariff control / control table
Fig. 4.5.4 Following changeover to a new switching program
The changeover date and the table contents stored temporarily until the changeover are deleted after the changeover.
At a later date the power supply company can again set a table structure with the corresponding changeover date, from which the time switch is to use these tables instead of the previous versions.
H 71 0200 0030 b en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL
4.6 Ripple control receiver
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.6-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 09.07.2002 First edition a 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 b 17.09.2003 C.3.1 instead of C.3.2 for status display
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Table of contents 4.6-3
Table of contents
4.6 Tariff control via ripple control receiver ________________________ 4.6-5 4.6.1 Field of application_________________________________________ 4.6-5 4.6.2 Functional principle of ripple control systems____________________ 4.6-5 4.6.3 Functional description of ripple control receiver __________________ 4.6-6 4.6.4 Test key of ripple control receiver_____________________________ 4.6-9 4.6.5 Technical data of ripple control receiver ________________________ 4.6-9 4.6.6 Ripple control receiver data on tariff face plate _________________ 4.6-10 4.6.7 Behaviour of ripple control receiver with mains failure____________ 4.6-11 4.6.8 Connection diagrams ______________________________________ 4.6-11 4.6.9 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.6-12
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.6-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.6-5
4.6 Tariff control via ripple control receiver This sub-chapter includes all relevant details concerning the ripple control receiver on the extension board, which largely corresponds with the stand-alone version RCR161.
For further information about the RCR161 ripple control receiver, reference is made to the relevant documents, in particular H1 2320 1570 en.
4.6.1 Field of application
The ripple control receiver can be used with the ZMD300xx and ZMD400xx meters with an 0030 or 0430 extension board. No ripple control receiver is supported for meters in three-phase three-wire networks (F-circuit).
4.6.2 Functional principle of ripple control systems
Ripple control systems are used for tariff and load control in electrical power supply networks. The ripple control signals required for this purpose are transmitted via the power supply network.
The power supply company feeds audio frequency signals from 110 to 2000 Hz from transmitters to the power supply network to one central or several decentralized network stations. These ripple control signals are superimposed on the mains voltage with an amplitude of a few percent of the relevant rated mains voltage. The audio frequency is switched on and off to transmit according to a specific pulse pattern to produce a "pulse telegram".
The ripple control receivers on the consumer side filter these audio fre-quency signals from the mains voltage and evaluate the pulse telegrams to control tariffs or to switch loads on or off.
Electronic ripple control receivers for tariff and load control are standard-ized according to EN 61037. The various manufacturers of ripple control systems have specified differ-ent types of pulse telegrams, which differ with respect to mark and space lengths as well as number of data pulses, viz.:
• Semagyr (Landis+Gyr)
• Ricontic (ABB)
• Decabit (Zellweger)
Details of the individual types of pulse telegrams are of no interest here, since the ripple control receiver integrated on the extension board can be used with practically all ripple control systems by parametrizing.
Pulse telegrams
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.6-6 Function
4.6.3 Functional description of ripple control receiver
The ripple control receiver (RCR) is integrated on an optional extension board in the meter. Two types of extension boards are fitted with this:
• 0030: extension board with ripple control receiver, without control inputs, without output contacts and without load profile
• 0430: extension board with ripple control receiver, without control inputs, with 4 output contacts
The functions of the ripple control receiver on the extension board corre-spond to those of the Landis & Gyr RCR161 stand-alone ripple control receiver. More detailed information can be found in the corresponding functional description H1 2320 1570 en.
The ripple control receiver on the extension board contains
• A pre-filter to remove the fundamental frequency (50 Hz) and trigger the power up and power down function.
• A circuit to generate the network clock signal from the mains frequency.
• A microprocessor with digital audio frequency filter, which evaluates the pulse telegrams received and forms the internal signals RCR1 to RCR6 for tariff control. The control signals CS1 to CS16 are produced in the control table from these signals (see 4.7 "Tariff control").
• A 7-day clock (with time-of-day, weekday, holidays, but without date) with switching functions.
• A non-volatile memory (EEPROM) to save the parameter data of the ripple control receiver.
• A test key.
Ripple control receiver RCR
Phase voltage230 V or 58 V Pre-filter
Pulsetelegram
Net-workclock
OpticalInterface
RPT01 Para-metrizationsoftware
RCR micro-processor
RCR1toRCR6
EEPROMmemory
Communi-cation bus
Test key
7-day clock
Networkclockgeneration
Fig. 4.6.1 Block schematic diagram of ripple control receiver
H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.6-7
The audio frequency signal superimposed on the mains voltage is fed single-phase to the ripple control receiver. Connection is made externally via a terminal. The ripple control receiver can be designed for a mains voltage of 58 V or 230 V. The earth connection is made internally from the meter. The behaviour of the ripple control receiver in the event of a mains failure is described in chapter 4.6.4. The ripple control receiver on the extension board contains a digital audio frequency filter with long-term stability integrated in the microprocessor, of which the centre frequency, level and bandwidth can be parametrized corresponding to the ripple control system used by the power supply company. Typical filter values lie in the following ranges:
• Centre frequency (rated control frequency) = 110 to 2000 Hz
• Level (rated function voltage) = 0.3 to 2.5 % of mains rated voltage
• Bandwidth = 0.6 to 6 % of rated control frequency
The choice of rated control frequency (audio frequency) is highly dependent on the power distribution network. For extensive networks with several voltage levels lower frequencies (below 250 Hz) are generally recommended, for networks of less extent higher frequencies.
The feed levels required are also dependent on the power supply network. The greater the extent, the higher the selected level, so that the ripple control receivers farthest from the feed point can also still reliably receive the pulse telegrams.
Narrow bandwidths are selected if the rated control frequency lies in the vicinity of harmonics of the mains frequency. The longer rise or decay times of narrow band filters require longer mark and space times of the pulse telegrams, so that the transmission takes a little longer in systems of this kind. The network clock signal is derived from the network frequency (50 or 60 Hz). It is required both in the microprocessor for decoding the pulse telegrams received and also for operating the 7-day clock. The 7-day clock (weekly clock) running synchronously with the mains permits autonomous operation without ripple control transmissions. For this purpose it has fixed parametrized time lines or so-called memo lines, with which it detects the telegrams arriving. It performs the commands stored in the time or memo lines, provided the receiver does not receive telegrams to the contrary.
It can be synchronized at any time with the time-of-day or current weekday with a pulse telegram. At the same time it transmits the synchronization to the calendar clock of the meter. Conversely the meter passes on a time shift (synchronize or set) to the 7-day clock, in particular when the voltage is restored after a failure.
Input signal
Audio frequency filter
Network clock
7-day clock
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.6-8 Function
The RCR microprocessor decodes the pulse telegrams filtered out of the mains voltage with the audio frequency filter and from these forms the signals RCR1 to RCR6 for the tariff control in the meter (see section 4.5). The RCR microprocessor can decode all customary pulse telegrams (Semagyr, Ricontic, Decabit, Double Decabit, K22/Z22, etc.). All variables necessary such as code length, pulse duration, etc. can be parametrized. The RCR microprocessor can exchange messages with the meter via a communication bus (e.g. status signals of the ripple control receiver or meter, time-of-day).
Further functions of the RCR microprocessor:
• Time functions (fixed or random switch on/off delay, wiper, loop, pulse-interval cycles)
• Learning functions (memorizing switching times and performance with loss of transmitter)
• Transmit repeat inhibit
• Programmed behaviour with mains failure and restoration
• Exact reset pulses, e.g. 14'51"/9"
• Automatic correction of pulse distortions
• Transmitter failure detection
• Setting time-of-day of meter or ripple control receiver
• Recording of specific events in non-volatile memory
The free programming capability enables the scope of functions to be continuously supplemented as required without exchanging hardware. The parameters and important instantaneous values for a mains failure are stored in the non-volatile memory (EEPROM) of the ripple control receiver. Access to the EEPROM via the RPT01 parametrizing tool is subject to strict security requirements according to EN 61010. Each of the 6 output signals RCR1 to RCR6 of the ripple control receiver basically represents the status of a "virtual" relay, i.e. for a conventional stand-alone ripple control receiver a relay could be operated directly in this way. With the integral ripple control receiver on the extension board these signals are fed to the control matrix in the meter for the tariff and load control. If a load is to be switched in this way, the corresponding output contact (solid state relay) is operated from the meter. The ripple control signals RCR1 to RCR6 are basically each derived from a double command. The receiver can execute the signals directly or first allow an interpreter program to run. These interpreter programs can for example delay a signal or trigger a recording as memo line.
RCR microprocessor
Memory
Output signals
Interpreter
H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.6-9
Parametrizing of the ripple control receiver is performed with the RPT01 parametrization tool, software for 32-bit Windows operating systems specially developed for parametrizing Landis+Gyr ripple control receivers, via a separate optical interface on the extension board. The parametrizing data are stored in a non-volatile memory (EEPROM) on the extension board.
The 6 RCR signals RCR1 to RCR6 are defined with the parametrizing of the ripple control receiver, while use of these 6 RCR signals is determined by the parametrizing of the meter with the MAP190 parametrization tool (matrix definition).
4.6.4 Test key of ripple control receiver
A parametrized switching program is triggered by pressing the test key. The effect can be checked from the resulting statuses of signals RCR1 to RCR6 (display or readout).
The test key – a plastic slider, which actuates a p.c.b. switch on the exten-sion board – is situated between the terminal blocks of the extension board.
Test key
T
Fig. 4.6.2 Arrangement of test key (example extension board 0430)
For access to the test key the terminal cover secured with factory seals must be removed.
Danger
Dangerous voltage
The test key should only be operated with a plastic tool suitable for this purpose. With a metal tool there is otherwise a danger of touching live conductors at the terminals. Contact with parts under voltage is dangerous to life.
4.6.5 Technical data of ripple control receiver
Standards
• Ripple control receiver ......................................................... EN 61037
• Safety conditions ................................................................. EN 61010
• EMC
- Emission ...................................................................... EN 50081-1
- Pollution ...................................................................... EN 50081-2
Parametrizing
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.6-10 Function
Ripple control systems
• All customary pulse codes (Semagyr, Ricontic, Decabit, Double Decabit, K22/Z22, etc.)
• Code length, pulse length and pulse position can be parametrized
Electrical values
• Input mains voltage single-phase ................................... 58 V or 230 V
• Frequency ........................................................................ 50 or 60 Hz
• Supply ........................................................... provided by basic meter
Filter values (parametrized)
• Rated function voltage Uf ......... typ. 0.3 to 2.5% of rated mains voltage
• Rated control frequency fs ........................................... 110 to 2000 Hz
• Bandwidth .................................................................. 0.6 to 6 % of fs
External influences
• Same as meter (see meter user manual)
4.6.6 Ripple control receiver data on tariff face plate
+A
Energy
T = Energy tariff
8.8...F.F0.0
Display checkFunctional errorIdentification
0.1.00.9.10.9.2
Reset counterTime-of-dayDate
AV
x
K3: BoilerK4: Electrial heatingK5: K6: ID-No: 0128.0013 F: 12fs (Hz): 183.3 Uf (%): 0.50
1.8.T
-A +Ri +Rc -Ri -Rc
1.8.02.8.T2.8.0
5.8.T5.8.0
6.8.T6.8.0
7.8.T7.8.0
8.8.T8.8.0 Total energy
S01: 1 imp = 1 WhS02: 1 imp = 1 Wh
Ownership designation
72 832 138C.6.02:1.8.03:1.8.0
Battery hours counterS01S02
Pmax cumulated1.2.0 2.2.0 5.2.0 6.2.0 7.2.0 8.2.0Last tm/P running1.4.0 2.4.0 5.4.0 6.4.0 7.4.0 8.4.0P last integr. period1.5.0 2.5.0 5.5.0 6.5.0 7.5.0 8.5.0Pmax1.6.0 2.6.0 5.6.0 6.6.0 7.6.0 8.6.0
1K1: 1 imp = 1 Wh (+A)K2: 1 imp = 100 varh (+R)
2
Fig. 4.6.3 Tariff face plate (example ZxD400CT)
1 Output contact data 2 Data of ripple control receiver RCR
H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.6-11
4.6.7 Behaviour of ripple control receiver with mains failure
If all phases are concerned during a power failure, the meter performs a controlled disconnection (blocking of inputs and outputs, switching of tariff unit to standby operation and backup of data). It sends the ripple control receiver a failure warning, which causes the latter to perform its own disconnection program, including saving data to the EEPROM and the power-down program if parametrized.
If the phase fails to which the ripple control receiver is connected, while the other two phase voltages or at least one remains, the ripple control receiver performs its own disconnection program and reports this to the meter. In this case the ripple control receiver does not receive a failure warning from the meter, but detects the failure as soon as the mains frequency fails for more than 500 ms.
If the neutral line fails, the ripple control receiver can in fact still generate the network clock, but it can no longer detect any ripple control signal. It will detect this status as transmitter failure. When the phase voltage(s) affected by the mains failure are restored, the ripple control receiver detects this by the return of the mains frequency and report by the meter. Following initializing of the ripple control receiver, there is a short wait until the audio frequency filter has responded and then run through the switch-on program (restoration of the data saved and setting of signals RCR1 to RCR6 corresponding to the parametrizing).
4.6.8 Connection diagrams
Lx
Extension board 0430
no control inputs
4 output contacts (solid-state relays)
Signal allocationfor free parametrization
30 61
K5 K6
64 65 66
K3 K4
61 62 63
with ripple controlreceiver
E
Fig. 4.6.4 Connection diagram extension board with ripple control receiver and
4 output contacts
Voltage interruption
Voltage restoration
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.6-12 Function
4.6.9 Display and readout
The following ripple control receiver values are available for display and readout depending on the parametrization:
• Statuses of signals RCR1 to RCR6
• Identification number of ripple control receiver
The operating status of the ripple control receiver can also be indicated with an arrow symbol in the display:
• Arrow absent = ripple control receiver not ready
• Arrow displayed = ripple control receiver receiving pulse telegram
• Arrow flashing = ripple control receiver ready
If signals RCR1 to RCR6 are used for tariff control, their statuses can also be seen from the tariff arrow symbols. Some examples are given below of ripple control receiver displays. The identification figures for the individual data correspond to the energy data identification system OBIS (see 5.2.3 "Identification number system").
Figure means Signal "1" (Pos. a) Line means Signal "0" (Pos. b)
Status of signals RCR1 to RCR6
C: service data
3: signal statuses
Identification number ripple control program
Values available
Display examples
H 71 0200 0026 f en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL
4.7 Tariff control
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0026 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.7-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 26.07.1999 First edition a 17.04.2000 Text and illustration adaptations after internal revision b 29.09.2000 Changes on pages 4 to 10 c 28.02.2002 Control signals and synchronizing updated d 01.05.2002 selectable synchronisation window of 2 to 9 s e 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 f 30.06.2003 Fig. 4.7.2 supplemented with voltage failure event
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0026 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Table of contents 4.7-3
Table of contents
4.7 Tariff control _____________________________________________ 4.7-5
4.7.1 Survey tariff control ________________________________________ 4.7-5
4.7.2 Control table _____________________________________________ 4.7-6
4.7.3 Registers/functions ________________________________________ 4.7-7
4.7.4 Aktivierung der Steuersignale ________________________________ 4.7-8
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0026 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.7-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0026 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.7-5
4.7 Tariff control This sub-chapter provides a survey of the various kinds of tariff control and the formation of control signals, as well as about the registers and functions controlled in this way.
4.7.1 Survey tariff control
ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx meters permit tariff control:
• via control inputs
• via the time switch (see 4.5)
• via a ripple control receiver (see 4.6)
• via event signals or status messages
The methods of tariff control listed permit the requirements of the power supply company to be suitably defined by parametrization any combina-tions (assuming the meter is designed for this purpose).
Signal sources- control inputs- statuses- event signals- time switch- ripple control receiver
AND matrix for24 logic signals LSx
etc.
etc.
etc.
OR matrix for16 control signals CS1-16
Energy / demand registersDemand monitoring
Operating times
Output relays / arrows
Control table
Reset inhibitSetting modeTest modeTime switch activeetc.
Fig. 4.7.1 Survey tariff control
Signals from the various signal sources can be combined to form logic signals in the AND matrix and in the following OR matrix to control signals. These control the energy and demand registers in addition to other functions. The meter can also use the time switch signals directly instead of the control signals.
All signals are available for transmission via output relays and activation of the arrows in the display, as well as the status signals such as "Reset inhibit active", "Meter in setting mode", etc.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0026 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.7-6 Function
4.7.2 Control table
Up to 16 control signals (CS1 to CS16) can be defined with the AND and OR matrices, so that they form combinations from the existing signals from the signal sources.
Control signals CS1 ... CS16
24 logic signals withAND combination
LS1 ... LS24
Matrix for assigninglogic signals LSto the sources
Time switch
Control inputs TI1 ... TI10
Eventsignals
Time/date invalid
Ripple control receiver RCR1 ... RCR6
Demand monitoringUnder/overvoltage
Voltage failureOvercurrent
Power factor fallen below
Statuses
TOU1 ... TOU16
etc.
etc.
OR matrix
Fig. 4.7.2 Formation of control signals
The following steps are necessary to determine the tariff control:
1. The power supply company first determines the required control functions, e.g. changeover of energy and demand tariffs with the associated tariff arrows in the display, based on the relevant tariff structure. Example: 3 energy and 2 demand tariffs.
2. Every control function requires one of the control signals CSx or the time switch signals TOUx directly. One control signal can serve several functions. Example: CS1 and CS2 for tariff 1 and tariff 2 energy and demand, CS3 for tariff 3 energy and demand inhibition.
3. The AND matrix links the signals of the relevant signal sources to logic signals LSx, the following OR matrix combines them to the control signals CSx. Example: external control with inputs TI1 and TI2 TI1 = 0 and TI2 = 0 produces LS1 TI1 = 1 and TI2 = 0 produces LS2 TI1 = 0 and TI2 = 1 produces LS3 TI1 = 1 and TI2 = 1 produces LS4 LS1 produces CS3 LS2 produces CS2 LS3 or LS4 produces CS1.
4. Finally the power supply company assigns the signals to the signal sources with respect to hardware or software (e.g. inputs to the control terminals). Example: TI1 Terminal T0-7 TI2 Terminal T0-8
H 71 0200 0026 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.7-7
Each control signal can have one of the 3 following statuses:
• 1 (active)
• 0 (inactive)
• blank (no function)
A control signal for example switches on a specific tariff register (energy or demand register) when active and off when inactive. The energy proportions of the selected measured value are accordingly recorded or not recorded in the register.
All control signals not required remain in the "blank" condition and therefore have no function.
Register or function
Control signal = "0" (inactive)
Tariff or function inactive
Register or function
Control signal = "1" (active)
Control signal = "blank" (no function)
Tariff or function active
Control signal not required
Fig. 4.7.3 Control signal statuses
4.7.3 Registers/functions
Demand registers
Energy registers ER1 ... ER24
Eventsignals
K1 ... K8
Operating time registers OTR1 ... OTR8
Power factor registers
Demand monitoringPower factor monitoring
Output relays
MDR1 ... MDR24
PFR1 + PFR2
Arrow 1 ... Arrow 12Arrows LCD
Control signalsCS1 to CS16
Time switch signalsTOU1 to TOU16
Signalsources
Fig. 4.7.4 Controllable registers and functions
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0026 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.7-8 Function
The following tariff registers and functions can be controlled according to the parametrization with control signals CS1 to CS16 or time switch signals TOU1 to TOU16:
• Energy registers (see 4.8 "Energy recording")
• Demand registers (see 4.9 "Demand recording")
• Operating time registers per tariff
• Power factor registers (see 4.10 "Power factors")
• Event signals of monitoring functions
• Output contacts
• Tariff arrows in liquid crystal display
The output relays and the arrows in the display can also be assigned to all other signal sources, such as event signals and additional statuses like reset inhibit, test mode, setting mode, etc.
4.7.4 Activation of control signals
The signals at the output of the control table (CS1 to CS16) can be synchronized with the integrating period by parametrizing. The following possibilities are available:
• All output signals only change their status at the end of the present integrating period. All tariff changeovers, signal controls, etc. are therefore synchronous with the integrating period and do not generate a new start of the integrating period.
• All output signals change their status immediately when a corresponding input signal changes.
• Every output signal can be synchronized individually with the integrating period. The output signals therefore respond in different ways to changes in the input signals.
H 71 0200 0024 h en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL
4.8 Energy recording
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.8-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 26.07.1999 First edition a 17.04.2000 Text adaptations after internal revision. b 28.09.2000 Various corrections c 12.03.2001 Energy registers rounding-off supplement d 22.06.2001 Number of AT/CT registers, number of stored values e 18.04.2002 Updating (terminology revision, types of recording, registers for
secondary data, residual value processing), ZxD410AT replaces ZxD210AT
f 01.05.2002 ZMD310AT included g 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 h 30.06.2003 Section 4.8.6: Reference added for memory determination for stored
values f
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Table of contents 4.8-3
Table of contents
4.8 Energy recording __________________________________________ 4.8-5 4.8.1 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.8-5 4.8.2 Available measured quantities for measured value formation _______ 4.8-6 4.8.3 Formation of energy proportions______________________________ 4.8-7 4.8.4 Types of energy recording___________________________________ 4.8-8 4.8.5 Tariff control ____________________________________________ 4.8-10 4.8.6 Formation of stored values _________________________________ 4.8-10 4.8.7 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.8-11 4.8.8 Energy registers for primary and secondary data________________ 4.8-12
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.8-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.8-5
4.8 Energy recording This sub-chapter explains in detail all functions for recording energy.
4.8.1 Survey
From the digital measured quantities prepared in the measuring unit (see 4.2 "Measuring unit") the power supply company can select up to 8 for further processing (by parametrization). These measured values can be recorded as follows:
• In the energy registers as energy status or energy consumption at energy tariffs
• In the total energy registers as energy status and
• In the demand registers at demand tariffs (see 4.9 "Demand recording")
In the combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx the power factors cosϕ can also be recorded in power factor registers (see 4.10 "Power factors"). ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx meters have 2 basic versions with respect to tariff unit:
• Version with tariff unit T21 or T24 This has energy and total energy registers, but no demand registers.
• Version with tariff unit T41 or T44 This has energy, total energy and demand registers.
The power supply company has 24 energy registers and 8 total energy registers available for energy recording by the ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx meters.
Formation of max. 8 meas. values
24 energy registersetc.
8 energy total registersetc.
24 demand registers
etc.
Tariff switching
Sele
ctio
n of
dat
a fo
r di
spla
y an
d re
adou
t
Readout
Display
Tariff switching
8 P running
Fig. 4.8.1 Block schematic diagram of energy recording ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx
Versions
Energy registers
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.8-6 Function
4.8.2 Available measured quantities for measured value formation
Various measured quantities for further processing are available depending on the meter type. From these the power supply company can form up to 8 measured values. Each measured value is assigned
• a power type (active power A / reactive power R / apparent power VA),
• the sum of the three phases (ΣL) or in the ZMD a single phase (L1/l2/L3) and
• one or more quadrants
The power types R and VA are only available in the combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx. In the active energy consumption meters ZMD300Ax / ZxD400Ax use of the quadrants is also restricted. The ZMD300Cx / ZMD400Cx has the most comprehensive measuring functions and therefore also provides the majority of measured quantities for further processing. In the energy and demand registers it can record a maximum of 8 power values and in the power factor registers the 4 power factors.
8 meas.values from meas.quantities/quadrants
+A
- A +R
- R
+VA
- VA
+/-
A1+
/-A2
+/-
A3
+/-
R1+
/-R2
+/-
R3
+/-
VA1
+/-
VA2
+/-
VA3
cosϕ
cos
1
ϕco
s
2ϕ
cos
3
ϕ
Fig. 4.8.2 Measured values of ZMD300Cx / ZMD400Cx
The ZFD400Cx only has the sum measured quantities and the mean power factor.
8 meas.values from meas.quantities/quadrants
+R
- R
+VA
- VA
cosϕ
+A
- A
Fig. 4.8.3 Measured values of ZFD400Cx
The ZMD300Ax / ZMD400Ax record the active power.
8 measured values
+A
- A +/-
A1+
/-A2
+/-
A3
Fig. 4.8.4 Measured values of ZMD300Ax / ZMD400Ax
ZMD300Cx / ZMD400Cx
ZFD400Cx
ZMD300Ax / ZMD400Ax
H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.8-7
The ZFD400Ax only have the sum measured quantities available.
8 measured values
+A
- A
Fig. 4.8.5 Measured values of ZFD400Ax
4.8.3 Formation of energy proportions
The measured values scanned every second are fed via the selection matrix to the memory for the present value of the energy register provided. These are energy proportions with fixed clock time (1 second) and varying power (e.g. mW).
Fixed clock frequency
Heightdependenton power
1 s Fig. 4.8.6 Energy proportions for energy and total energy registers
Adaptation to kWh takes place in the energy register, whereby the resolution of the memory is sufficient to permit recording of the very small amounts of energy during starting. With low power in comparison with the rated power, several energy proportions are required before the value of the last register digit (1/10 Wh) is reached and the energy register is increased by 1. For this purpose a value register receives the energy proportions arriving (adds the new energy proportion value I to any remainder in the value register) and subtracts from this the highest possible integral multiple X of the significance of the last digit. This amount X is fed to the energy or total energy register, the rest remains in the value register.
00000000 0000 kWh
I - X 0.100 Wh.Energy proportion value I
Example:0.001 to over 20,000 Wh X
total 12 digits
of which 4decimal places
Value register
Fig. 4.8.7 Processing of energy proportions
ZFD400Ax
Processing of energy proportions
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.8-8 Function
Example:
Time Energy proportion value I
Value register Energy register
0 s 12.446 Wh 0.046 Wh 0000.0124 kWh
1 s 15.372 Wh 0.018 Wh 0000.0278 kWh
2 s 13.567 Wh 0.085 Wh 0000.0413 kWh
3 s 21.123 Wh 0.008 Wh 0000.0635 kWh
Adaptation of the energy proportions is based on general principles, which apply both to mechanical counters as well as electronic tariff units. The highest power applied to the meter, the energy register units (e.g. kWh or MWh) and the value represented by the last digit of the energy register (0.1 - 1 - 10 etc. kWh) are then decisive.
The resolution matched to the maximum demand is shown with those for the demand registers in the following table:
Energy Demand
P highest Reading
Decade reading constant
Reading
Decade reading constant
50 … 500 W 0000.000 k...h none 0.000 k... none
500 W … 5 kW 00000.00 k...h none 0.000 k... none
5 … 50 kW 000000.0 k...h none 00.00 k... none
50 … 500 kW 0000000 k...h none 000.0 k... none
500 … 5000 kW 00000.00 M...h 0000000 k...h
none x 10
0.000 M... 0000 k...
none x 1
5 … 50 MW 000000.0 M...h 0000000 k...h
none x 100
00.00 M... 0000 k...
none x 10
50 … 500 MW 0000000 M...h 0000000 k...h
none x 1000
000.0 M... 0000 k...
none x 100
k... / k...h = kW / kWh or kvar / kvarh or kVA / kVAh
M... / M...h = MW / MWh or Mvar / Mvarh or MVA / MVAh
4.8.4 Types of energy recording
The energy registers of the meter can record the energy proportions arriving in the following ways:
• as cumulated status (with or without stored values)
• as advance during the billing period (always stored values)
• as advance during the recording period of the load profile (only for recording in the load profile)
Register resolution
Energy recording
H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.8-9
max. 8 measured
values
Energy register 1
max. 24 energy registers
8 registers, 1 each per measured value
Tariff switching
Status or
Resetting
Latest
Cumulated statusLatest
Total energy register 1
Energy register X
Recording period
Advance Load profile
stored value
stored valueconsumption
Fig. 4.8.8 Energy recording With energy recording as status the memory runningly adds the present value of energy. The consumption during a billing period is obtained from the difference between new and old status. Calculation of the energy consumption is made after every reading in the EDP of the power supply company.
The reason that processing of the status is still preferred by the power supply company is because of the same processing for electronic and mechanical meters (the latter cannot record any advance).
The total energy registers always record the cumulated status, even if the energy registers operate with energy consumption.
0026300
0032900
0037200
0042500Storage
4300
5300
6600
at end of billing period
Fig. 4.8.9 Energy recording as cumulated status For energy recording as advance during the billing period the meter sets the contents of the energy register concerned to zero at the end of the billing period and saves the previously determined consumption as stored value. It then records the energy consumption during the next billing period and saves this again as stored value. The power supply company can use the consumptions determined in this way directly for billing.
Cumulated status
Advance during the billing period
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.8-10 Function
0026300
0032900
0037200
0042500Reset at end of billing period
4300
5300
6600
Energy recording as cumulated status
Energy recording as advance6600
4300
5300
Fig. 4.8.10 Energy recording as advance during the billing period Energy recording as advance during the recording period basically operates in the same way as energy recording as advance during the billing period. The meter uses a separate register, however, and the recording period of the load profile as control signal for start and end of energy recording. The register content is fed immediately and exclusively to the load profile, but not to the stored values registers. It can also only be displayed and read out via the load profile.
One of the 24 energy registers is required for every measured value to be recorded as energy advance in the load profile. This is then not available for the tariff control. If the meter records energy as advance, it only stores the value according to the section as stored value or in the load profile. The remainder not displayed is retained in the memory and is included in the next billing or integrating period. The sum of energy advances therefore always corresponds to the cumulated status of the total energy registers.
4.8.5 Tariff control
The tariff switching determines which energy registers take over the energy proportions at the given time. The maximum of 8 measured quantities have up to 24 energy registers available for the ZxD410Ax/310Cx/400Cx, to permit a convenient tariff structure for the various values.
The associated energy proportions are runningly summated in the total energy registers.
4.8.6 Formation of stored values
At the end of the billing period the reset signal stores the present value as latest stored value. The number of possible stored values can be parametrized (refer to section 4.13.3 "Memory management", section "Memory determination for stored values"). Every time a new stored value is stored, the oldest stored value is overwritten.
Advance during the recording period
Residual value processing
Resetting
H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.8-11
4.8.7 Display and readout
The resolution of the total energy and energy tariff registers can be parametrized and has 7 or 8 digits with up to 4 decimal places. Either kWh / kvarh / kVAh or MWh / Mvarh / MVAh can be used as unit.
The resolution of the advances can similarly be parametrized. The registers are displayed 5-digit with up to 4 decimal places. Since a maximum of 8 digits can be shown in the value field of the liquid crystal display (see 5.2), a window is placed over the register for the display. This determines the visible range.
00000000 0000 kWh
00000000 0000 kWh
Display (examples)
7 digits withoutdecimal place
8 digits with 1 decimal place
Test mode on
Test mode off
Fig. 4.8.11 Display window
A so-called test mode is provided for test purposes, which uses a higher resolution of the registers and therefore reduces the testing time accord-ingly. The desired resolution can be parametrized, but no more than 8 digits are available. The values are shown the same in the readout as in the display. Some examples are given below of energy register displays. The identifica-tion figures for the individual data correspond to the energy data identification system OBIS (see 5.2.3 "Identification number system").
Active energy import (1)
Status (8)
Tariff 1
Active energy import (1)
Status (8)
Tariff 1
Stored value 02 (February)
Active energy import (1)
Total status (8.0)
Reactive energy import (3)
Status (8)
Tariff 2
Register size
Display
Readout
Display examples
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.8-12 Function
Reactive energy in first quadrant (5)
Status (8)
Tariff 2
Active energy export (2)
Status (8)
Tariff 1
Apparent energy import (9)
Status (8)
Tariff 1
Active energy import in phase L1 (21)
Status (8)
Tariff 2
Active energy import in phase L2 (41)
Status (8)
Tariff 2
4.8.8 Energy registers for primary and secondary data
Meters for transformer connection (ZxD400Ax and ZxD400Cx) can be parametrized for primary or secondary data.
The transformer data can be parametrized individually, by which the meter directly supplies the data assigned to the transformers connected. The display and readout data need no longer then be multiplied by a trans-formation factor.
The individual parametrization of the meters to primary data is frequently not protected by the calibration seals. Some countries therefore demand that in parallel with the primary data the meters must also record at least the energy with reference to the secondary data.
For this purpose it is possible with the meters ZxD400Ax and ZxD400Cx to parametrize the energy registers in principle with respect to the primary or secondary data. The first 16 energy registers are assigned for primary data and the 8 registers ER17 to ER24 for secondary data.
H 71 0200 0025 e en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL
4.9 Demand recording
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.9-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 11.02.2000 First edition − 17.04.2000 Text adaptations after internal revision a 28.09.2000 Various corrections b 22.01.2001 Number of AT/CT registers, number of stored values c 18.04.2002 Updating (terminology revision, rolling maximum, residual value
processing), ZxD210AT replaced by ZxD410AT d 01.05.2002 ZMD310AT included e 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrTable of contents 4.9-3
Table of contents
4.9 Demand recording _________________________________________ 4.9-5
4.9.1 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.9-5
4.9.2 Available measured quantities for measured value formation _______ 4.9-6
4.9.3 Formation of demand values _________________________________ 4.9-7
4.9.4 Formation of mean value of demand __________________________ 4.9-9
4.9.5 Mean demand value for last integrating period__________________ 4.9-11
4.9.6 Maximum demand ________________________________________ 4.9-12
4.9.7 Controlling the integrating period ____________________________ 4.9-14
4.9.8 New start of integrating period ______________________________ 4.9-16
4.9.9 Demand inhibition ________________________________________ 4.9-18
4.9.10 Signal transfer ___________________________________________ 4.9-19
4.9.11 Display and readout _______________________________________ 4.9-19
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.9-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.9-5
4.9 Demand recording This sub-chapter explains in detail all functions for recording demand.
4.9.1 Survey
From the digital measured quantities prepared in the measuring unit (see 4.2 "Measuring unit") the power supply company can select up to 8 for further processing (by parametrization). These measured values can be recorded as follows:
• In the energy registers as energy status or energy consumption at energy tariffs (see 4.8 "Energy recording")
• In the total energy registers as energy status (see also 4.8 "Energy recording") and
• In the demand registers at demand tariffs
In the combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx the power factors cosϕ can also be recorded in power factor registers (see 4.10 "Power factors"). ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx meters have 2 basic versions with respect to tariff unit:
• Version with tariff unit T21 or T24 This has energy and total energy registers, but no demand registers.
• Version with tariff unit T41 or T44 This has energy, total energy and demand registers.
For demand recording by the meters ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx the power supply company has available 8 registers for running mean values of demand and 24 demand registers.
Formation of max. 8 measured values
24 energy registersetc.
8 total energy registersetc.
24 demand registers
etc.
Tariff switching
Sele
ctio
n of
dat
a fo
rdi
spla
y an
d lo
g
Readout
Display
Tariff switching
8 P running
Fig. 4.9.1 Block schematic diagram of demand recording ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx
Versions
Demand registers
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.9-6 Function
4.9.2 Available measured quantities for measured value formation
Various measured quantities for further processing are available depending on the meter type. From these the power supply company can form up to 8 measured values. Each measured value is assigned
• a power type (active power A / reactive power R / apparent power VA),
• the sum of the three phases (ΣL) or in the ZMD a single phase (L1/l2/L3) and
• one or more quadrants
The power types R and VA are only available in the combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx. In the active energy consumption meters ZMD300Ax / ZxD400Ax use of the quadrants is also restricted. The ZMD300Cx / ZMD400Cx has the most comprehensive measuring functions and therefore also provides the majority of measured quantities for further processing. In the energy and demand registers it can record a maximum of 8 power values and in the power factor registers the 4 power factors.
8 meas.values from meas.quantities/quadrants
+A
- A +R
- R
+VA
- VA
+/-
A1+
/-A2
+/-
A3
+/-
R1+
/-R2
+/-
R3
+/-
VA1
+/-
VA2
+/-
VA3
cosϕ
cos
1
ϕco
s
2ϕ
cos
3
ϕ
Fig. 4.9.2 Measured values of ZMD300Cx / ZMD400Cx
The ZFD400Cx only has the sum measured quantities and the mean power factor.
8 meas.values from meas.quantities/quadrants
+R
- R
+VA
- VA
cosϕ
+A
- A
Fig. 4.9.3 Measured values of ZFD400Cx
The ZMD300Ax / ZMD400Ax record the active power.
8 measured values
+A
- A +/-
A1+
/-A2
+/-
A3
Fig. 4.9.4 Measured values of ZMD300Ax / ZMD400Ax
ZMD300Cx / ZMD400Cx
ZFD400Cx
ZMD300Ax / ZMD400Ax
H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.9-7
The ZFD400Ax only have the sum measured quantities available.
8 measured values
+A
- A
Fig. 4.9.5 Measured values of ZFD400Ax
4.9.3 Formation of demand values
The measured values scanned every second are fed to the assigned mean values of demand register. These are energy proportions with fixed clock time (1 second) and varying power (e.g. mW).
Fixed clock frequency
Heightdependenton power
1 s Fig. 4.9.6 Energy proportions The energy proportions are adapted to the integrating period selected, i.e. multiplied by a factor inversely proportional to the integrating period. Examples:
• Multiplication factor 1 for a pulse interval of 60 minutes.
• Multiplication factor 4 for a pulse interval of 15 minutes.
• Multiplication factor 12 for a pulse interval of 5 minutes.
kW
- X 0.1 kWProportion value
Example:0.004 to over 80 W X (can only be 1
in this example)
Value register
0 000
.Energyproportionvalue
MMP I
Multiplication integrating period e.g. 4 for 15 min
I
I PP
Fig. 4.9.7 Processing of energy proportions
With low power in comparison with the rated power, several energy proportions are required before the value of the last register digit is reached and the register is increased by 1.
For this purpose a value register receives the energy proportions arriving (adds the new energy proportion value I to any remainder in the value register) and subtracts from this the highest possible integral multiple X of the significance of the last digit. This figure X is fed to the register, the remainder remains in the value register.
ZFD400Ax
Energy proportions
Processing of energy proportions
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.9-8 Function
Example:
Time Energy proportion value I Value register Demand register
0 s 0.046 kW 0.046 kW 000.0 kW
1 s 0.049 kW 0.095 kW 000.0 kW
2 s 0.053 kW 0.048 kW 000.1 kW
3 s 0.055 kW 0.003 kW 000.2 kW
The resolution of the demand registers (significance of last visible digit) is basically dependent on the maximum power of the meter. The capacity of the register must be sufficiently large to ensure there is no overflow. The resolution of the register, however, should also not be too small.
The resolution of the demand registers matched to the maximum meter power is shown together with that of the energy registers in the following table (demand registers with 4 digits):
Energy Demand
P highest Reading
Decade reading constant
Reading
Decade reading constant
50 … 500 W 0000.000 k...h none 0.000 k... none
500 W … 5 kW 00000.00 k...h none 0.000 k... none
5 … 50 kW 000000.0 k...h none 00.00 k... none
50 … 500 kW 0000000 k...h none 000.0 k... none
500 … 5000 kW 00000.00 M...h 0000000 k...h
none x 10
0.000 M... 0000 k...
none x 1
5 … 50 MW 000000.0 M...h 0000000 k...h
none x 100
00.00 M...0000 k...
none x 10
50 … 500 MW 0000000 M...h 0000000 k...h
none x 1000
000.0 M... 0000 k...
none x 100
k... / k...h = kW / kWh or kvar / kvarh or kVA / kVAh
M... / M...h = MW / MWh or Mvar / Mvarh or MVA / MVAh
Register resolution
H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.9-9
4.9.4 Formation of mean value of demand
The existing 8 registers for mean values of demand of the running integrating period are permanently assigned to the 8 selected measured values. Each of these registers summates the measured values assigned during one integrating period. At the end of the integrating period the running mean values of demand are available for further processing in the demand registers. Several demand registers can access the same mean value of demand (different tariffs).
tm = integrating period
tm tm
P running
t
P
Fig. 4.9.8 Running mean value of demand
If the energy consumption varies, the mean value of demand can fluctuate considerably from one integrating period to the next. The power supply company can, however, then also combine several intervals to a total integrating period to form a rolling mean value, which is renewed at every interval.
For this purpose the individual mean values of demand formed during an interval period are accepted at the end of every interval period in a ring memory. The rolling mean value of demand is then formed from the relevant latest ring memory contents (up to 15 intervals can be considered).
The rolling mean value of demand is subject to smaller jumps with fluctuating energy consumption than the individual mean value. The more intervals considered for an integrating period, the better the smoothing.
The formation of the rolling mean value of demand begins with the first subinterval following a reset or tariff switching. As shown in the following example, a complete integrating period (5 intervals here) is required before the rolling mean value is formed. A new valid mean value of demand is then available at the end of every interval period (335 kW, 329 kW, 351 kW, etc.).
Simple mean value
Rolling mean value
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.9-10 Function
256309
271
kW 478
360
225
423
330
171
363
51113
167
263
335 329 351 363302
336 364
Gleitender Mittelwertüber 5 Intervallperioden
P interval
kW
complete intgrating period over 5 interval periods
P rolling
Fig. 4.9.9 Formation of rolling mean value of demand
The rolling mean value is provided as average value of the ring buffer contents, in the example shown therefore as follows (all values in kW):
Interval 1: (0+0+0+0+0)/5 = 0
Interval 2: (256+0+0+0+0)/5 = 51
Interval 3: (309+256+0+0+0)/5 = 113
Interval 4: (271+309+256+0+0)/5 = 167
Interval 5: (478+271+309+256+0)/5 = 263
Interval 6: (360+478+271+309+256)/5 = 335 (1st valid value)
Interval 7: (225+360+478+271+309)/5 = 329 (2nd valid value)
Interval 8: (423+225+360+478+271)/5 = 351 (3rd valid value) etc.
H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.9-11
The following conditions apply to the determination of the interval and integrating period:
• Minimum interval and integrating period duration: 1 min
• Maximum interval and integrating period duration: 60 min
• Maximum number of intervals per integrating period: 15
This provides the following possibilities for interval determination:
Number of intervals
1 2 3 4 5 6 10 12 15
Integrating period
in minutes Duration of interval period in minutes
1 1 – – – – – – – –
2 2 1 – – – – – – –
3 3 - 1 – – – – – –
5 5 – – – 1 – – – –
10 10 5 – – 2 – 1 – –
15 15 – 5 – 3 – – – 1
20 20 10 – 5 4 – 2 – –
30 30 15 10 – 6 5 3 – 2
60 60 30 20 15 12 10 6 5 4
4.9.5 Mean demand value for last integrating period
At the beginning of every integrating period the running mean demand values are reset each time to zero. They are first stored as mean demand values for the last integrating period (freeze function) and are therefore available for display and readout during the next integrating period.
In the case of rolling mean value, the present mean demand value is stored as mean value of demand at the end of every subinterval period. At the end of the integrating or subinterval period only the visible part of the present mean demand value is stored as mean value of demand for the last integrating period in the load profile.
The residual value remaining in the value register is taken into account in the next integrating period. With simple demand measurement the mean values of demand for the last integrating period can be taken over by the load profile memory. The value is stored in the load profile at the end of every integrating period.The sum of the integrating periods therefore corresponds in this case to the cumulated status of the total energy registers.
Possible intervals
Residual value processing
Load profile
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.9-12 Function
In the case of rolling mean value, two cases are possible:
• If the recording period for the load profile corresponds to the subinterval period, the mean value can be stored for the subinterval. It is not possible to store the mean value over several subinterval periods or the integrating period.
• If the recording period for the load profile corresponds to the integrating period, no demand values can be stored in the load profile. In this case energy values (statuses or advances) must be used.
4.9.6 Maximum demand
The highest mean value of demand determined during the entire billing period is highly important for tariff control.
P running
P
t
Demand
P max
Fig. 4.9.10 Determination of maximum demand
Provided the corresponding active tariff and demand measurement are not limited by the power supply company (refer to 4.9.9 "Demand inhibition"), the meter therefore compares the present mean value of demand at the end of each integrating period with the previous highest mean value of demand for the present billing period.
• If the present mean demand value is less than the highest mean value of demand, the maximum demand remains unchanged.
• If the present mean demand value is greater than the highest mean value of demand, the meter stores the present mean demand value as new maximum demand and simultaneously records the time (date and time-of-day) at which the new maximum occurred.
The meter therefore determines a large number of mean demand values during the entire billing period, but normally only records the highest value. All other values are lost, unless the values are stored in a load profile.
H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.9-13
At the end of the billing period the reset signal stores the present maximum demand value together with date and time as latest stored value.
Several stored values of succeeding integrating periods remain stored. Every time a new stored value is stored, the oldest stored value is overwritten.
At the same time the maximum demand value is added to the previous sum of all maximum demand values and stored as cumulated maximum demand in the corresponding register. The maximum demand is then reset to zero and determination of a new maximum for the new billing period starts. Each demand register comprises a memory each for the present maximum demand and for the cumulated maximum demand as well as up to 15 memories for stored values.
Various demand values for the tariff control can be recorded in the 24 demand registers available. Any of the 8 existing mean values of demand can also be assigned to each demand register as input quantity. Several demand registers can also access the same mean value of demand to form various tariffs.
max. 8 measured values
Demand register 1
Tariff switching
Reset
Latest stored value
2 : P max 11>2? Date/timeyes
P max cumul.
DisplayReadout
P interval x
P runninglast integrating
period
1: P running= P rolling
from N P intervalN = 1 to 15
Calendarclock
Fig. 4.9.11 Demand registers The tariff switching determines which demand registers take over the energy proportions at the given time. The maximum 8 present mean values of demand have up to 24 demand registers available to permit a convenient tariff structure for the various values.
Resetting
Demand registers
Tariff control
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.9-14 Function
4.9.7 Controlling the integrating period
Control of the integrating period can take place in three different ways:
• internally via the calendar clock and synchronized with this
• internally via the calendar clock, but not synchronized with this
• externally via a control input Control of the integrating period takes place internally by the quartz oscillator of the calendar clock (see section 4.4). The integrating period can then be synchronized with the time-of-day, so that it always starts on the full hour (e.g. integrating period of 15 minutes starting at 10:00, 10:15, 10:30, 10:45, 11:00, 11:15 etc.).
This form of control is normally used. When using load profiles this setting is even essential, since otherwise the profiles cannot be further processed by a data evaluation centre. Control of the integrating period is likewise internal, but not synchronized with the time-of-day. The integrating period is started again every time the unit is started.
Since all units of the ZxD300 and ZxD400 series have a calendar clock, this application is somewhat unusual. It is used above all for very simple units without calendar clock and without load profile. The external control of the integrating period is made via the same input mB as the demand inhibition (see chapter 4.9.9). The internal control does in fact run parallel, but the external has higher priority and determines the time grid of the integrating period.
Time shift
t
normally negligible
internal control signal from quartz oscillator
New startintregrating period
t
external control signal via terminal mB
New startintregrating period
t
Fig. 4.9.12 Externally controlled integrating period
If the external signal comes before the internal, the demand comparison takes place immediately with a new start of the integrating period.
internal, synchronous
internal, asynchronous
External Control
H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.9-15
If the internal signal is before the external, it likewise initiates the demand comparison and re-starts the integrating period. This re-start is interrupted, however, by the following external signal which re-starts itself. This normally produces a small time shift, but this is negligible if the external control is sufficiently accurate. The power supply company, however, must ensure sufficient accuracy of the external control.
If the external control signal fails for any reason, the internal signal automatically takes over control of the integrating period while the external signal is absent.
This permits the power supply company to use both internal and external control without having to use a second version for this purpose. With internal control, however, the control input mB must always have voltage applied (signal status "1"), since otherwise there is no demand measurement (see 4.9.9 "Demand inhibition"). The integrating period is controlled by negative pulses (status "0") with a duration of at least 2 seconds and maximum 60 seconds.
t IP t IP
t
P
t
Controlsignal t pulse
1
0
P running
Fig. 4.9.13 External control of integrating period
Principle of control
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.9-16 Function
4.9.8 New start of integrating period
The following events result in a new start of the integrating period:
• Voltage failure
kWP running
Voltage failure
Voltage return
t IPt IP t<t IP Voltage interruption
asynchronous integrating period IP
New start IP
kWP running
Voltage failure Voltage return
t<t IPt IP
N x t IP
t IP
time-synchronized integrating period IP
t IP
New start IP
kWP running
Voltage failureVoltage return
t IP t IP
New start IP
t IP t IP
t IP
Fig. 4.9.14 New start integrating period with voltage failure
- always with an asynchronous integrating period
- with time-synchronized integrating period always if the voltage inter-ruption continues beyond the integrating period. A shorter period then occurs for a new start, since the next new start is given by the time-synchronism (see illustration above, bottom). If the voltage is restored within the integrating period, the meter can continue demand measurement depending on the parametrizing and conclude in the correct manner (see illustration above, centre) or re-start.
• Setting time/date
- no new start with an asynchronous integrating period
- always with a time-synchronized integrating period
The shift in particular of the time-of-day would cause a too long (reset time) or too short integrating period (advance time). It is therefore necessary to re-start the time-synchronous integrating period (see following figure, middle part).
The meter does, however, have a time window of 1% of the integrating period or max. 9 seconds, within which there is no new start.
H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.9-17
asynchronous integrating period IP
kWP running Time shift
Tariff switchingReset
t IPt IP t IP
New start IP
t<t IP
no new start IP
kWP running
t<t IPt IP t IP
time-synchronous integrating period IP
t IP
Time shift
Tariff switchingReset
t<t IPt IP
New start IP
no new start IP
kWP running
t IP t IPt IP
Tariff switchingReset
t IP
no new start IPpower comparison onlyat the end of the IP
Fig. 4.9.15 New start integrating period with time shift, tariff switching, reset
• Synchronize time (with time-synchronized interval period)
Synchronization of the time has the same effect as a shift, if the deviation is more than 1 % of the integrating period, but max. 9 seconds (see chapter 4.5.3 "Calendar clock").
• Changeover demand tariff
- always with an asynchronous integrating period
- similarly with a time-synchronized integrating period, unless the meter only performs the tariff changeover at the end of the integrating period (see illustration above, bottom)
• Actuate reset
- always with an asynchronous integrating period
- similarly with a time-synchronized integrating period, unless the meter only performs the tariff changeover at the end of the integrating period (see illustration above, bottom)
For an integrating period begun, the meter always performs a demand comparison. For an asynchronous integrating period it always starts in the new tariff or in the new reset period with a full integrating period.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.9-18 Function
No new start of the integrating period is made for the following events:
• Set/synchronize time (for asynchronous integrating period)
• Demand tariff switching (for time-synchronized integrating period or external control of integrating period)
• Actuate reset (for time-synchronized integrating period or external control of integrating period)
With time-synchronized integrating period a tariff changeover or reset must not interrupt the integrating period. In the event of external control the signal transmitter determines the start and end of the integrating period.
The meter, however, always performs a demand comparison in the old tariff or in the expired reset period. Two interrupted periods are possibly produced.
4.9.9 Demand inhibition
The power supply company can interrupt demand measurement for certain periods, e.g. on low tariff or during the weekend.
It should be noted, however, that only the formation of the maximum demands, but not that of the running mean demand, can be suppressed. This is because it must be possible to suppress the formation of the maximum but recording in the load profile should be continued.
Control of this time limiting is possible externally via the control input mB or by the internal control signals. The following applies if the integrating period is controlled externally via input mB: following every interruption of the signal voltage (status "0") at input mB, the meter performs a demand comparison and immediately restarts the integrating period. If the signal voltage returns within 60 seconds (status "1") as is the case with external control of the integrating period, the demand measurement started continues normally. If the control signal mB is interrupted for more than 60 seconds, the demand measurement is ended without demand comparison until voltage is restored to input mB.
New start ofintegrating period
60 s
t
tControl signal mB
Time limit of thepower recording
Fig. 4.9.16 Externally controlled limiting of demand measurement with external
control of integrating period
If, however, the integrating period is controlled internally, limiting via an external control input is not possible directly (see also below).
No new start
External control
H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.9-19
As mentioned above, only the formation of maximum demands can be suppressed. This is performed by setting the control signal of the maximum demand register to status "0". This can take place for example with a ripple control receiver or a time switch.
It is also possible by corresponding parametrizing of the control table to provide this function by an external control input.
4.9.10 Signal transfer
The integrating period can be transferred to external equipment via an output contact of the meter. The transfer is made according to the following diagram either in the
• opening circuit, in which the relay is connected in series with the contact or
• short-circuit connection, in which the relay is connected in parallel with the contact
The contact is closed during the integrating period and controls by signal interruption. The interruption, i.e. the decoupling time te is 1 % of the integrating period, i.e. 9 seconds for example with a period of 15 minutes.
Integrating period te
Opening circuit
Fig. 4.9.17 Transfer contact integrating period as opening circuit
The signal for demand limiting can be transferred in the same way. The contact is then open or closed throughout the time limit of the demand measurement. Following re-start of the integrating period at the end of the time limit, the contact closes delayed by the decoupling time te (1 % of the integrating period).
4.9.11 Display and readout
The resolution of the demand registers can be parametrized:
The mean demand values and maximum demands are either 4 or 5 digits with up to 4 decimal places. Either kW / kvar / kVA or MW / Mvar / MVA can be used as unit.
The cumulated maximum registers have 6 or 7 digits, with up to 4 decimal places possible.
Internal control
Register size
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.9-20 Function
The following demand register values are available for display and readout depending on the parametrization:
• present status of cumulated maxima
• present demand mean value with status of integrating period
• demand mean value of preceding interval period
• present demand maximum during the current resetting period with date and time of occurrence
• demand maxima of preceding billing periods as stored values, similarly with date and time
Some examples are given below of demand register displays. The identifi-cation figures for the individual data correspond to the energy data identification system OBIS (see 5.2.3 "Identification number system").
Cumulated demand maximum
Active power import Tariff 1
Present demand mean value
Active power import Tariff 1
Demand mean value of preceding interval period
Active power import Tariff 1
Demand maximum of present billing period
Active power import Tariff 1
Date of present demand maximum
Active power import Tariff 1
Time-of-day of present demand maximum
Active power import Tariff 1
Stored value 04 of present demand maximum
Active power import Tariff 1
Values available
Display examples
H 71 0200 0033 a en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL
4.10 Power factors
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0033 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.10-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 28.02.2002 First edition a 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0033 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrTable of contents 4.10-3
Table of contents
4.10 Power factors ____________________________________________ 4.10-5 4.10.1 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.10-5 4.10.2 Formation of mean value during integrating period ______________ 4.10-6 4.10.3 Formation of mean value during resetting period________________ 4.10-8 4.10.4 Display and readout _______________________________________ 4.10-9
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0033 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.10-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0033 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.10-5
4.10 Power factors This sub-section explains in detail all functions for recording power factors.
4.10.1 Survey
Recording of power factors cosφ is reserved for combimeters ZMD300Cx and ZxD400Cx, which calculate these from the relevant active and apparent powers, if the meter is configured accordingly. The following instantaneous values of power factors are provided by the microprocessor as measured quantities, i.e. calculated every second from the relevant active and apparent powers (see also 4.2.3 "Formation of measured quantities"):
• PF total: Total power factor cosϕ (mean value of the 3 phases)
• PF L1: Power factor cosϕ1 of phase L1 (only in ZMD)
• PF L2: Power factor cosϕ2 of phase L2 (only in ZMD)
• PF L3: Power factor cosϕ3 of phase L3 (only in ZMD)
PF total = A LS L S = P + Q2 2
S = U I.rms rms
orPF L1 = A L1S L1
PF L2 = A L2S L2
PF L3 = A L3S L3
PF x Instantaneous valueReadout PF x
Display PF x
Calculation of PF xfrom A (active power)and S (reactive power)every second
Calculation of S:
Fig. 4.10.1 Instantaneous values of power factors
These instantaneous values of power factors are available for display and readout. No other use is provided. The mean value of power factor during the integrating period can be formed from the running mean values of demand of active and apparent power recorded during the last integrating period (positive sum of the three phases) and from this the minimum power factor determined. The mean value can also be accepted by the data profile to permit the energy supply company also to assign the relevant power factor to the individual mean values of demand and the maximum demand.
Instantaneous values
Mean value during integrating period
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0033 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.10-6 Function
From the total energy of active and apparent power recorded (positive sum of the three phases) the meter can finally also calculate a mean value during the resetting period (billing period). The meter calculates the value every second and can save it at the end of the resetting period as stored value.
Formation of max. 8 measured values
24 energy registersetc.
8 total energy registersetc.
24 demand registers
etc.
Tariff switching
Sele
ctio
n of
dat
a fo
rdi
spla
y an
d lo
g
Readout
Display
Power factor registers
Tariff switching
8 P running
cos ϕ
Fig. 4.10.2 Block schematic diagram of mean value formation power factor cosφ Readout of the data recorded can be made according to IEC 62056-21 or the DLMS concept (see chapter 6 "Communication interfaces"). The data can also be displayed.
4.10.2 Formation of mean value during integrating period
Only combimeters with tariff unit T41 or T44, i.e. with demand recording, can form this mean value during the integrating period. The two measured values
• active power import in the three phases +A and
• apparent power import in the three phases +S
must be set by the parametrization to determine the power factor during the integrating period. Of these the meter uses the running demand mean value of the integrating period just completed to calculate the mean power factor PF IP during the integrating period. Owing to the powers +A and +S the calculation is limited to quadrants Q I and Q IV.
Mean value during resetting period
Readout/Display
H 71 0200 0033 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.10-7
Measured values
P last IP S
P last IP +A
P running S
P running +A
PF IP = P last IP +AP last IP S
Tariff switching
PF register 1
PF register 2
Data profile
Measured value 8 apparent power (sum of phases)
Measured value 7 activepower (sum of phases)
for minimum power factor
Fig. 4.10.3 Mean value formation during integrating period The evaluation, i.e. the determination of the power factor minimum PF min, is made in one or two power factor registers similar to maximum formation in the demand registers.
PF register 2
Tariff switching
1: PF last IP
Reset
latest stored value
2 : PF min 21>2? Date/timeyes
PF min cumul.
Calendar clock
DisplayReadout
PF register 1
Tariff switching
Reset
latest stored value
2 : PF min 11>2? Date/timeyes
PF min cumul.
Calendar clock
DisplayReadout
minimumapparent power
yes1.0
T > T min ?
Fig. 4.10.4 Determination of minimum power factor PF min
Each power factor register comprises a memory for both the present minimum power factor PF min and the cumulated minimum power factor PF min cumulated, in addition to several memories for stored values.
At the end of every integrating period a comparison is made of the present minimum power factor PF min (lowest value of power factor so far) and the mean value of power factor PF last IP determined during the integrating period. If PF last IP is less than the present PF min, the PF last IP is stored as new PF min together with date and time. Otherwise PF min remains unchanged.
A threshold for the minimum apparent power prevents the meter recording the (frequently worse) power factor at demands which are too low.
Before resetting at the end of the billing period PF min is cumulated in the PF min cumulated memory and recorded as stored value together with date and time. The present PF min is then set to the value 1 and the time reset to zero.
Minimum formation
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0033 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.10-8 Function
The tariff switching determines in which of the two power factor registers the comparison is made.
4.10.3 Formation of mean value during resetting period
Combimeters with tariff unit T21 or T24, i.e. without demand recording, can also form the mean value during the resetting period (billing period). The two measured values
• active power import in the three phases +A and
• apparent power import in the three phases +S
must also be set by the parametrization to determine the power factor during the resetting or billing period. Of these the meter uses the relevant value of two energy registers with energy import to calculate the mean power factor PF RP during the resetting period. Owing to the powers +A and +S the calculation is limited to quadrants Q I and Q IV.
Reset
latest stored value
Measuredvalues
ME8: Energy import +S
ME7: Energy import +A
PF RP = Energy import +A
Energy import +S
Register PF RP
Measured value 8 apparentpower (sum of phases)
Measured value 7 activepower (sum of phases)
Mean value over billing periodnewly calculated every second
Fig. 4.10.5 Mean value formation during resetting period
Since the values of the energy registers are updated every second, a new calculation of the power factor is also performed every second during the resetting period.
Before resetting at the end of the billing period PF RP is saved as stored value together with date and time. The PF RP register is then reset to the value 1.
Tariff switching
H 71 0200 0033 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.10-9
4.10.4 Display and readout
The following values are available for display and readout depending on the parametrization
• instantaneous values
• present status of cumulated minimum PF min cumulated
• the mean value at the end of the integrating period PF last IP
• the present power factor minimum PF min during the present billing period with time of day and date of occurrence
• the power factor minima PF min in the preceding billing periods as stored values likewise with time and date
• the number of times exceeded per power factor threshold Some examples are given below of power factor register displays. The identification figures for the individual data correspond to the energy data identification system OBIS (see 5.2.3 "Identification number system").
cosϕ (13)
Mean value of last integrating period (5)
cosϕ (13)
Minimum of current billing period (3)
Date of minimum
Time-of-day of minimum
cosϕ (13)
Minimum – stored value of April (04)
cosϕ (13)
Mean value of current resetting period (0)
Values available
Display examples
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0033 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.10-10 Function
cosϕ phase L1 (33)
Instantaneous value (7)
H 71 0200 0244 - en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL
4.11 Operating time registers
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0244 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.11-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 31.03.2003 First edition
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0244 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrTable of contents 4.11-3
Table of contents
4.11 Operating time registers ___________________________________ 4.11-5 4.11.1 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.11-5
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0244 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.11-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0244 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.11-5
4.11 Operating time registers This sub-chapter explains the functions of the operating time registers.
4.11.1 Survey
The following operating times can be recorded in operating time registers:
• Total operating time of meter
• Operating time per tariff specified
• Operating time of battery This register shows the total operating time of the meter in the network. The time is measured and added in the register as soon as the meter is connected to the supply.
The register can be cleared together with the operating times for each tariff via the interface. A maximum of 8 operating time registers with tariff settings are available. Control is performed in the same way as for the energy or demand registers. The total operating time can therefore be assigned to the individual tariffs. The sum of the registers with tariff should always be the same as the total operating time. If this is not the case, there may be a meter malfunction present or an attempted fraud.
The registers can be cleared together with the total operating time via the interface. This register measures the time during which the battery is inserted in the unit. It is immaterial whether the unit has voltage applied or not. By regular measurement of the battery voltage the battery is also used during mains operation.
When the battery is changed the register must be cleared via the interface or in setting mode. The operating time registers are displayed in minutes. Some examples are given below of operating time register displays. The identification figures for the individual data correspond to the energy data identification system OBIS (see 5.2.3 "Identification number system").
Total operating time (0)
C: service data
8: operating time
Operating time tariff 1 (1)
C: service data
8: operating time
Total operating time
Operating time per tariff
Battery operating time
Display and readout
Display examples
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0244 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.11-6 Function
Battery operating time (0)
C: service data
6: battery
H 71 0200 0245 a en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL
4.12 Formation of billing periods (resetting)
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0245 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.12-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 31.03.2003 First edition a 30.06.2003 Section 4.12.3: Reference added for memory determination for stored
values
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0245 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Table of contents 4.12-3
Table of contents
4.12 Formation of billing periods (resetting)________________________ 4.12-5 4.12.1 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.12-5 4.12.2 Reset block______________________________________________ 4.12-5 4.12.3 Identification of stored values_______________________________ 4.12-6 4.12.4 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.12-6
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0245 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.12-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0245 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.12-5
4.12 Formation of billing periods (resetting) This sub-chapter explains resetting of the registers at the end of billing periods.
4.12.1 Survey
Resetting at the end of a billing period applies to the energy, total energy, maximum demand and minimum power factor registers and can take place in the following ways:
• Manually with the reset button (This is situated under the front door and is secured with a company seal.)
• Externally via the corresponding control terminals with the functions KA and KB
• Internally by the calendar clock, e.g.
- exactly at the end of the month (reset is always made at midnight, i.e. on the first day of the following month at 00:00, since 24:00 does not exist)
- in any month or every 2nd, 3rd, 4th month, etc.
- on one or two specific days within a month always at midnight
- on a specific day every week (1 = Monday - 7 = Sunday) at midnight in each case
- coupled to the summer/winter changeover
• Internally by the ripple control receiver of the extension board
• By a formatted command via the serial interface (With a handheld terminal, for example, the reader can actuate the reset locally and then read out the data without opening a seal.)
The reset always affects the entire meter, i.e. all registers.
4.12.2 Reset block
Every reset, regardless how initiated, starts a time window, during which a further reset is not possible, the so-called reset block. The duration can be selected between 0 minutes (no block) and several hours. A voltage interruption can remove the block, which can be particularly useful during a test. The reset block (inhibit) only acts on the source which has actuated the reset. The other sources are not blocked. Depending on the parametrizing the active reset block is indicated by a flashing arrow.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0245 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.12-6 Function
4.12.3 Identification of stored values
With a reset the correspondingly parametrized register values are stored in the stored value profile (refer to section 4.13.3 "Memory management", section "Memory determination for stored values"). The index of the stored values is given a specific supplement. This can either be the status of the reset meter or, particularly with monthly resetting, the number of the relevant month. Example: 1.8.1.07 = status active energy tariff 1 end of July.
With monthly numbering the stored values for January are therefore always given the number 01, those for February the number 02, etc. From this number the reader can immediately allocate the stored value to the relevant month. This form of numbering refers to the calendar clock. If a second reset takes place within one month (e.g. for a change of customer) two stored values have the same number. They can then be distinguished on one hand by the sequence and on the other hand by the time of resetting.
If the reset takes place at midnight, the time shows the date and time-of-day of the following day. Nevertheless the stored value still receives the number of the foregoing period, e.g. of the previous month. This also applies if the reset signal arrives after midnight. The meter has a time window of 6 hours, within which it uses the number of the previous month.
4.12.4 Display and readout
The following values are available for display and readout depending on the parametrization:
• Reset counter
• Time of last reset
• Stored values reset counter (number, date and time)
• Stored values of registers stored in stored value profile (date, time and register value)
Some examples are given below of reset displays. The identification numbers for the individual data correspond to the energy data identification system OBIS (see 5.2.3 "Identification number system").
Reset counter
Measured quantity 0
Type of measurement 1.0
Date of reset
Stored value 03
1st april 2002
Values available
Display examples
H 71 0200 0245 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.12-7
Time-of-day of reset
Stored value 03
00:00 midnight
Active energy import (1)
Status (8)
Tariff 1
Stored value 03
Storage date
Stored value 03
1st april 2002
Storage time
Stored value 03
00:00 midnight
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0245 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.12-8 Function
H 71 0200 0032 e en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL
4.13 Profiles
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.13-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 29.09.2000 First edition a 18.12.2000 Status entry adapted in data profile b 02.04.2001 "Reset" event type supplemented c 18.04.2002 Measured values, event signals, status entry, memory depth and display
updated, data profile replaced by load profile, status supplemented d 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 e 30.06.2003 New memory management with software version B21, new events
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Table of contents 4.13-3
Table of contents
4.13 Profiles _________________________________________________ 4.13-5 4.13.1 Event log _______________________________________________ 4.13-5 4.13.2 Load profile _____________________________________________ 4.13-8 4.13.3 Memory management ____________________________________ 4.13-13
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.13-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.13-5
4.13 Profiles This sub-chapter explains the functions of the event log (aperiodic memory) and of the load profile (periodic memory) and division of the available memory.
4.13.1 Event log
The event log is an aperiodic memory. The time of occurrence (time and date) and the relevant event number are therefore always recorded for specific events. For every event the meter can store additional data such as event signals, error reports or statuses of the total energy registers. The memory required for each entry in the event log varies accordingly.
The memory available for the event profile can be determined by the power supply company within specific limits by the parametrization (see section 4.13.3 "Memory management").
The event log entries can be displayed and read out via the interfaces. For display the event log can be selected with its own menu item in the display menu (see chapter 5.3 "Types of display"). The following table shows which event types can be recorded under which event number in the event log:
Event type Number
Tariff registers cleared 2
Load profile memory cleared 3
Battery charge low 5
Battery voltage ok 7
Meter reset performed 8
Summer/winter changeover 9
Time/date newly set (old values) 10
Time/date newly set (new values) 11
Control inputs status changed 13
Undervoltage phase L1 17
Undervoltage phase L2 18
Undervoltage phase L3 19
Overvoltage phase L1 20
Overvoltage phase L2 21
Overvoltage phase L3 22
Voltage failure 23
Voltage return 24
Overcurrent phase L1 25
Overcurrent phase L2 26
Overcurrent phase L3 27
Overcurrent neutral 28
Event types
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.13-6 Function
Event type Number
Power factors fallen below (4) 29 to 32
Power factors exceeded (8) 33 to 40
Error during self-test (4) 45 to 48
Voltage failure phase 1 49
Voltage failure phase 2 50
Voltage failure phase 3 51
Error "Battery voltage low" 65
Error "Time/date invalid" 66
Error "Access measuring system memory" 75
Error "Time base" 76
Error "Ripple control receiver" 78
Error "Communication unit" 79
Error "Display and control panel“ 80
Error "Internal overflow in measuring system" 89
Error "Measuring system failed" 90
Error "Re-programming failed" 91
Error "Setting mode failed" 92
Error "System failed" 93
Error "Communication blocked" 94
Error "Wrong flash memory identification" 95
Error "Wrong function extensions identification" 96
Failure of an SMS message transmission to GSM modem 105
Important operating message recorded 106
The power supply company can determine by parametrizing whether the event log is to be contained in the display or service menu. The following procedure should be adopted to display entries in the event log:
1. Starting from the operating display press the "up" or "down" display button briefly. The display check appears.
2. If the event is contained in the display menu, press the "up" or "down"
display button again briefly. If the event is contained in the service menu, press the Reset button briefly under the front door. The first item of the menu concerned appears, e.g. "Display list" (standard data).
Display
H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.13-7
3. Press the "up" or "down" display button briefly until the "Event log"
menu item appears (denoted with P.98).
4. Press the "up" or "down" display button (at least 2 seconds) until the
date of the first event appears. The power supply company can determine by parametrizing whether the latest event appears first followed by the others in decreasing date sequence or whether the oldest appears first with the others in increasing date sequence.
(30 June 2002)
5. Press the "down" display button briefly. The time-of-day of the first event is displayed.
6. Press the "down" display button briefly.
The number of the first event is displayed.
(Voltage failure)
7. Display the remaining entries in the event log in chronological order by holding down the "down" display button. The end of the event log is denoted by "End".
8. Press the "up" or "down" display button (at least 2 seconds) until
return is made to the display menu. (Simultaneous operation of the "up" and "down" display buttons interrupts the present function and causes a return to the operating display.)
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.13-8 Function
The event log data can be read out with DLMS or according to the VDEW specification (R5/R6 commands). The power supply company can read the complete profile or only a part. For this purpose the start and end of the part must be entered with a readout instruction.
4.13.2 Load profile
In contrast to the event log, the load profile is a periodic memory, which continuously records the quantities specified following every recording period (this normally corresponds to the integrating period). The following events lead to additional entries in the load profile: voltage failure and voltage restoration, time shifts and manual resets. Every entry in the load profile comprises a time, various important status information items and the individual measured values. The maximum 16 channels of the load profile comprise time entry, status entry and the maximum 14 possible measured values.
up to 14 measured valuesDate / Time Status
Fig. 4.13.1 Structure of load profile The memory available for the load profile can be determined by the power supply company within specific limits by parametrization (see section 4.13.3 "Memory management"). The following measured values can be recorded in the load profile:
• Demand mean values (P last integrating period)
• Power factor mean values (PF last integrating period)
• Energy tariff registers (status or advance)
• Total energy registers
• Phase voltages as mean value in integrating period
• Phase currents as mean value in integrating period
• Mains frequency as mean value in integrating period If the load profile records the mean demand values, the recording period corresponds to the integrating period (or to the interval period with rolling demand measurement) of the demand registers (see also chapter 4.9 "Demand recording"). If it only records the energy tariff register values, the status of the energy totals, the voltages and/or currents, the recording period can be set individually. The status entry comprises the following bits (bit 0 = LSB):
Bit 0 Fatal error occurred
Bit 1 Power reserve of calendar clock exhausted (time invalid)
Bit 2 Incomplete measurement owing to integrating period too short
Readout
Structure
Measured values
Recording period
Status entry
H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.13-9
Bit 3 Summer or winter time Depending on the parametrization this bit is static (1 = summer, 0 = winter) or dynamic, i.e. only active during the first recording period follow-ing the change from summer to winter time and vice-versa.
Bit 4 Resetting performed
Bit 5 Time/date set
Bit 6 Voltages returned (power up)
Bit 7 Voltages (3 phases) failed (power down)
Bit 8 not used
Bit 9 not used
Bit 10 not used
Bit 11 not used
Bit 12 not used
Bit 13 Event log completely deleted
Bit 14 Load profile memory completely deleted
Bit 15 Status word recorded before setting last time
Bit 16 reserved
Bit 17 reserved
Bit 18 reserved
Bit 19 Integrating period started (SOI - start of interval)
Bit 20 Integrating period ended by tariff changeover (EOI - end of interval)
Bit 21 Integrating period ended prematurely (e.g. by time setting)
Bit 22 Integrating period ended normally by external control
Bit 23 Integrating period ended normally by internal control
Bit 24 to Bit 31 reserved for future extensions
It can be selected by parametrizing whether bits 0 to 15 or bits 0 to 31 are to be displayed. Entries in the load profile can be displayed on the meter as follows:
1. Starting from the operating display press the "up" or "down" display button briefly. The display check appears.
2. Press the "up" or "down" display button again briefly.
The first item of the display menu appears, e.g. "Display list" (standard data).
Display
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.13-10 Function
3. Press the "up" or "down" display button briefly until the "Load profile"
menu item appears (denoted with P.01).
4. Press the "up" or "down" display button (at least 2 seconds) until the
date of the last entry appears.
(30 August 2002)
5. Press the "up" or "down" display button briefly until the date of the desired day appears (the end of the load profile is denoted with "End", see also point 9).
(29 August 2002)
6. Press the "up" or "down" display button (at least 2 seconds) until the time of the first recording or integrating period of the day appears.
7. Press "up" or "down" display button briefly until the time of the
desired recording or integrating period appears.
All measured values and the status entry are shown in a rolling display (changing every 2 seconds).
Status entry display (8 = summer)
H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.13-11
e.g. P last IP of +A
e.g. P last IP of +Ri
8. Press the "up" or "down" display button briefly. The time of the next or preceding recording or integrating period is displayed with their measured values in a rolling display. The end of the day is denoted with "End".
9. Press the "up" or "down" display button (at least 2 seconds) until a
jump is made to the next highest level (day selection list or display menu). Simultaneous operation of the "up" and "down" display buttons interrupts the present function at any time and causes a return to the operating display.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.13-12 Function
Status entry display:
Bits 0 to 7
1248 1248Fatal error presentTime/date invalid (power reserve exhausted)Incomplete measurement, IP too shortSummer/winter (8=summer, 0=winter)
Reset performedTime/date resetVoltage restored (power up)
Value in hexadecimal code
Sum of values
Total voltage failure (power down) Both figures can have a value between 0 (no bit set) and F (all 4 bits set).
Bits 8 to 15
1248 1248****
*Event log completely deletedLoad profile memory completely deletedStatus word recorded before setting last time
Value in hexadecimal code
Sum of values
* not used
The first figure can have the value 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 or 14, the second figure is not used. The data of the load profile can be read out with DLMS or IEC 62056-21 according to the VDEW specification. The power supply company can read the entire profile or part of it. Deletion of the data in the load profile is only possible in accordance with the specific national provisions.
With re-parametrization of the load profile structure (e.g. more or less channels) the entire load profile is deleted automatically.
Readout
Deleting load profile
H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.13-13
4.13.3 Memory management
Meters of the ZxD series with software version B21 or higher have a defined memory area, which can be freely assigned by the power supply company within specific limits for the data to be stored. The power supply company is therefore able to assign more or less memory in the meter configuration for stored values, event log or load profile according to requirements.
Note
Free division of memory only possible when ordering
The division of the memory must be made at the time of ordering. It cannot be altered retroactively. The memory area is defined for the billing values and cannot be changed, which ensures that there is always sufficient memory available for all energy, demand and other registers.
The remaining memory can only be freely divided in complete memory blocks (so-called "memory pages"). A single memory page comprises 263 bytes.
Constant memory areafor billing data
Variable memory areafor stored valuesVariable memory areafor event log
Variable memory area for load profile
Maximum memory areafor stored values and profiles (480 kBytes)
Fig. 4.13.2 Division of memory area available 480 kbytes are available. These can be allocated as follows:
Use Memory size Number of memory pages
Stored values 0 to max. 20 kByte 0 to max. 78
Event log 0 to max. 21.5 kByte 0 to max. 84
Load profile 0 to max. 480 kByte 0 to max. 1870
In ZxD meters the stored values for energy, power and power factor registers are stored in one profile. In the display and readout according to IEC, however, they are shown allocated to the relevant register.
Memory determination for stored values
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.13-14 Function
The memory required for the stored values depends on the profile width and memory depth:
• Profile width: number of registers for which stored values are formed, i.e. maximum 24 energy and 24 demand or power factor registers
• Memory depth: number of stored values to be stored by each register, i.e. maximum 53 stored values (corresponding to one year with weekly resetting)
Both functions can be freely defined by the power supply company. The memory required, however, can comprise a maximum of 21.5 kbytes. The following table shows the memory required for the individual values:
Value Memory required
Reset actuation (always stored) 1 byte
Reset time (always stored) 5 bytes
Reset counter (always stored) 4 bytes
Energy tariff registers (status or advance) 6 bytes per register
Demand registers (demand maximum with time stamp) 9 bytes per register
Power factor registers (minimum with time stamp) 9 bytes per register
Recording of 16 energy registers, 16 demand registers and 2 power factor registers with 15 stored values each per register.
Memory required = 15 • ((16 • 6) + (18 • 9) + 1 + 5 + 4) bytes = 4020 bytes or 16 memory blocks
Specific information or registers defined by the meter parametrizing are stored in the event log for every event, likewise determined by the meter parametrizing.
The memory required for the event log depends on the profile width and memory depth:
• Profile width: type and number of registers stored for every event, e.g. status information, total energy registers
• Memory depth: number of events to be stored in the event log, i.e. maximum 255 events
Both functions can be freely specified by the power supply company. The memory required, however, can amount to maximum 20 kbytes. The following table shows the memory required for the individual values:
Value Memory required
Time of event (always stored) 5 bytes
EDIS status (always stored) 2 bytes
Event number (should always be stored) 1 byte
Error register 4 bytes
Total energy registers 1 to 10 6 bytes per register
Example:
Memory determination for event log
H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.13-15
Recording of 250 events with time of day, EDIS status, event number and error register.
Memory required = 250 • (5 + 2 + 1 + 4) bytes = 3000 bytes or 12 memory blocks
The memory available for the load profile is determined automatically by the order program based on the total memory and the memory assigned for the stored value profile and event log. For this purpose, however, the load profile must be activated in the meter configuration.
The memory required for the load profile depends on the profile width, the length of the recording period and the memory depth:
• Profile width: number of registers stored in the load profile, i.e. maximum 14 energy, demand or instantaneous value registers
• Length of recording period: (selectable between 1 and 60 minutes): this determines the number of entries per day
• Memory depth: number of days to be recorded in the load profile
All three functions can be freely defined by the power supply company. The memory required, however, can only comprise a maximum of 480 kbytes. The following table shows the memory required for the individual values:
Value Memory required
Time of load profile entry (always stored) 5 bytes
EDIS status (always stored) 4 bytes
Demand mean values of last integrating period 4 bytes
Power factor mean values of last integrating period 4 bytes
Energy tariff registers (status or advance) 6 bytes
Total energy registers 6 bytes
Phase voltages as mean value in integrating period 4 bytes
Phase currents as mean value in integrating period 4 bytes
Mains frequency as mean value in integrating period 4 bytes
The memory depth of the load profile is calculated by the following formula:
Memory available in bytes (bytes per entry) • (integrating periods per day + 1)
Recording of 4 mean demand values with a recording period of 15 minutes (96 entries per day) and 460 kbytes available memory.
Memory depth = 460'000 / ((5 + 4 + (4 • 4)) • (96 + 1)) = 189 days
Example:
Memory determination for load profile
Example 1:
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.13-16 Function
Recording of 6 energy registers, 1 power factor register and 3 phase voltages with a recording period of 5 minutes (288 entries per day) and 480 kbytes available memory.
Memory depth = 480'000 / ((5 + 4 + (6 • 6)+ 4 + (3 • 4)) • (288 + 1)) = 27 days
Example 2:
H 71 0200 0031 d en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL
4.14 Monitoring functions
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.14-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 29.09.2000 First edition a 07.01.2002 Hysteresis limit value p. 4.10-5 now 5..3600 s (1..3600s) b 18.04.2002 ZxD210AT replaced by ZxD410AT c 02.05.2002 ZMD310AT included d 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrTable of contents 4.14-3
Table of contents
4.14 Monitoring functions ______________________________________ 4.14-5 4.14.1 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.14-5 4.14.2 Functional principle _______________________________________ 4.14-5 4.14.3 Application possibilities for event signals_______________________ 4.14-7 4.14.4 Voltage monitoring________________________________________ 4.14-7 4.14.5 Current monitoring________________________________________ 4.14-8 4.14.6 Demand monitoring _______________________________________ 4.14-8 4.14.7 Power factor monitoring ___________________________________ 4.14-9
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.14-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.14-5
4.14 Monitoring functions This sub-chapter explains the functions for monitoring values and the generation and transmission of corresponding event signals.
4.14.1 Survey
The meters ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx can monitor various values and generate event signals if specific limits are exceeded or fallen below for a sufficiently long time. These event signals can be used for tariff control (see chapter 4.7), for counting in event registers, for entry in the event log (see chapter 4.13) or for transmission to external devices via an output contact.
Active energy or combimeters can monitor the values in the table below:
Values and type of monitoring ZMD300Ax ZxD400Ax
ZMD300Cx ZxD400Cx
Phase voltages (failure, over- and undervoltages)
yes yes
Phase currents (overcurrents) yes yes
Neutral current (overcurrent) ZMD only ZMD only
Running demand mean value or demand mean value of last integrating period (exceeded)
yes yes
Power factor mean value (fallen below) no yes
Other values monitored or recorded are mains frequency, direction of rotating field and the phase angles. They only appear in the display or readout, however, and are not therefore described further here.
4.14.2 Functional principle
Threshold T
no
M > T ?or
M < T ?
yes
no
ny = n M ?
Number n M
yes
VoltageCurrent
P runningPower factor
Set event M
Hysteresis
Interrogationof monitored
value Mnext value
counter nny=nx+1
ny=nx-1nx 0
no ny = 0 ?yes
Delete event M
Fig. 4.14.1 Principle of monitoring of value exceeded
Monitoring of exceeding of a value takes place on the following principle (monitoring of falling below operates in a similar way).
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.14-6 Function
The value M monitored (e.g. a phase voltage) is compared every second with a specific limit (threshold T). If the value M monitored is greater than the threshold T, the so-called hysteresis counter n is increased by 1 or counts upwards every second if this condition continues.
When the count has reached a specific limit value x (adjustable from 5 to 3600 s) the counter generates the corresponding event signal, provided the signal from the CS matrix or timer has released the monitoring of value M.
The power supply company can set the response sensitivity as required with the hysteresis limit value x (1 = immediate response the first time the value is exceeded, 3600 = response only after the value has been exceeded for one hour). If the value M monitored is smaller than the threshold T, the hysteresis counter n remains at zero or is reduced by 1 if its count is not already zero. Any event signal set is only deleted when the count is zero. The event is therefore set with a delay and deleted according to the set hysteresis limit value x. The diagram below shows the effect of hysteresis with the example of voltage monitoring with a hysteresis limit value x of 5.
Hysteresis counterwith limit value x = 5 Threshold T for overvoltage
Voltage waveshape(mean values per second)
Time
Voltage
Duration of overvoltage
Overvoltageevent
set deleted
543210
Fig. 4.14.2 Effect of hysteresis
In the example above the overvoltage event is set with a delay of 5 seconds after the threshold is exceeded because the hysteresis counter only reaches its limit value after 5 values of overvoltage are detected.
To delete the overvoltage event the voltage must also lie below the threshold for at least 5 seconds, since the hysteresis counter only returns to zero after the threshold has been fallen below 5 times.
If the voltage exceeds the threshold for less than 5 seconds, the counter does not set an event. Nor does it delete it if the voltage falls below the threshold briefly.
Value too high
Value not too high
Hysteresis
H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.14-7
4.14.3 Application possibilities for event signals
If the meter has recorded an event and this is released, the corresponding event signal can be used as follows:
• Tariff control Each event signal can be set via the control matrix for tariff control, e.g. if the phase current exceeds a specific threshold, it could set the meter to a different tariff level.
• Event counter An event counter counts the individual events and provides this to the display and/or the readout.
• Entry in event log The counter records the time and date on which the event occurred. It can therefore record the event with the corresponding number, time and date in the event log (aperiodic memory). This provides the power supply company with an event log corresponding to its requirements.
• Transmission The event signal can also be transmitted to external devices via an output contact. It can also activate one of the arrows of the display to indicate the relevant status optically.
4.14.4 Voltage monitoring
The voltage monitoring comprises the following elements:
• Voltage failure in each individual phase (fixed threshold 20 V)
• Total voltage failure in all phases
• Overvoltage in each individual phase (parametrized threshold)
• Undervoltage in each individual phase (parametrized threshold) If the individual phase voltages are greater than 35 V, the meter can check these for under- and overvoltages. For this purpose the power supply company sets a lower and an upper threshold.
If a phase voltage falls below the lower threshold, the meter sets the event signal "Undervoltage" for the relevant phase after a delay determined by the hysteresis.
If a phase voltage exceeds the upper threshold, the meter sets the event signal "Overvoltage" for the relevant phase after a delay determined by the hysteresis.
The meter can accept both an undervoltage and an overvoltage as described in section 4.14.3.
Under-/overvoltage
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.14-8 Function
4.14.5 Current monitoring
The current monitoring comprises the following individual monitored values:
• Overcurrent in individual phases (parametrized threshold)
• Overcurrent in neutral in the ZMD (parametrized threshold) The meter checks the individual phase currents and the neutral current (ZMD) with respect to overcurrent (= overload). The power supply company can set a threshold for this purpose.
If a phase current or neutral current falls below its threshold, the meter sets the event signal "Overcurrent" for the relevant phase or neutral after a delay determined by the hysteresis.
The meter can accept an overcurrent as described in section 4.14.3.
4.14.6 Demand monitoring
The meter can monitor the running mean values of demand for maximum 8 measured values with respect to exceeding of individually adjustable thresholds.
For this the meter uses either the running mean value of demand or the mean value of the last integrating period of a measured value. Since it concerns a value determined over the integrating period, no hysteresis is required. For the running mean value of demand the event is deleted automatically at the end of the integrating period.
The power supply company can operate the demand monitoring continu-ously or release or block it with the release signal. All signals present in the tariff control are available as release signal.
The meter can accept an exceeding of the demand as described in section 4.14.3.
Running or last mean value
t IP = Integrating period
t IP t IP
Running mean demand value
Monitoring of running mean value
Monitoring of last mean value
Demand threshold
Fig. 4.14.3 Running or last mean value
Overcurrent
H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrFunction 4.14-9
• Running mean value
With the running mean value the event occurs exactly when the mean value exceeds the threshold, i.e. at an unspecified time within the integrating period.
The power supply company should therefore use monitoring of the running mean value when there is to be an immediate reaction to exceeding of the threshold. This is particularly the case with load control, where the power supply company wants to pass on the event signal to external devices.
The running mean value is less suitable for direct tariff control.
• Mean value during last integrating period
If the power supply company uses demand monitoring for tariff control, it is recommended to monitor the mean value during the last integrating period. In this case the meter only sets the event at the end of the integrating period, i.e. when the new mean value during the last integrating period occurs. The tariff switching is therefore synchronized with the integrating period, which is essential in conjunction with load profiles.
4.14.7 Power factor monitoring
Monitoring of the power factor is only possible in the combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx. The meter can monitor the mean values of power factor with respect to falling below an individually adjustable threshold.
If the mean value of power factor falls below the set threshold, the meter immediately sets the event signal "Power factor fallen below" for the relevant measured value. Since each power factor mean value is already determined over the integrating period, no hysteresis is required. The event signal is deleted again automatically at the end of the integrating period.
The meter can accept a falling below of the power factor as described in section 4.14.3.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.14-10 Function
H 71 0200 0038 e en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL
4.15 Security system
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0038 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.15-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 26.07.1999 First edition a 17.04.2000 Text and illustration adaptations after internal revision. Section 8.3 new. b 29.09.2000 Changes on pages 4 to 6 c 28.02.2002 Security switch S2 instead of S1 d 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 e 30.06.2003 Sequence of sections adapted, additional clarifications
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0038 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Table of contents 4.15-3
Table of contents
4.15 Security system __________________________________________ 4.15-5 4.15.1 Introduction _____________________________________________ 4.15-5 4.15.2 Security levels ___________________________________________ 4.15-5 4.15.3 Security attributes ________________________________________ 4.15-6 4.15.4 Security levels and their application __________________________ 4.15-7 4.15.5 Allocation of access rights to data and parameter groups _________ 4.15-9
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0038 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.15-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0038 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Funktionsweise 4.15-5
4.15 Security system This sub-chapter explains the meter security system.
4.15.1 Introduction
The data and parameters of the ZxD meters are protected against inadvertent or improper overwriting by a multi-stage security system.
Note
Security system cannot be changed
The security system must be defined when ordering according to the requirements of the power supply company. It can no longer be altered in the field.
4.15.2 Security levels
The ZxD meters feature 16 different security levels (level 0 to 9 and A to F) with different access rights each. A distinction is also made between read access and write access. For each register and each parameter, it can be defined which level is required to read and which level is required to write.
All levels are strictly independent i.e. a higher level does not automatically bear all rights of the lower levels.
In order to simplify the handling and to ensure compatibility to the ZxD and ZxB meter families, the security characteristics of all levels have been partially or completely fixed.
Exteralunite.g.
handheldterminal
PCetc.
stat
ic p
assw
ords
P1,
Px,
..
code
d pa
ssw
ords
P2, P
y, ..
Util
ity s
eal
Res
et b
utto
n R
Cert
ifica
tion
seal
Switc
h S2
Opt
ical
inte
rfac
e
Inte
rfac
e 1
Com
m. u
nit
Level 0
free
acc
ess
Communicationinterfaces
Level 5
Level 1Level 2Level 3Level 4
Level 14
Level 6to
Manufacturer level
P1
P2
Px
P..
Py
P..
Security level
Access for manufacturer only
P..
fixed link
parametized link
Link with password
Inte
rfac
e 2
Com
m. u
nit
Access protection for users
Inte
rnal
RS4
85in
terf
ace
Fig. 4.15.1 Example for the access to the various security levels
It should be noted when using the dims protocol that access is possible at all levels. If the IEC protocol is used exclusively for communication, only the lower 5 levels are available (level 0 – level 4).
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0038 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.15-6 Funktionsweise
The following security elements can still be selected for some levels:
• Password (if it is used)
• Access via the external channels of the communication unit can be enabled or disabled.
4.15.3 Security attributes
The meter and the communication unit feature several access levels with different security attributes. For each access level, the security attributes can be defined that must be fullfilled for a successful data access. Under the main face plate, protected by the verification seal, there is a block of hardware switches. Their position must be defined in order to gain access to a particular level:
ON
1 2 3
ON = Switch closed
OFF = Switch open
S1: must always be open (OFF)
S2: Parameterisation switch used for reparameterisations. If this switch is closed (ON), flashing arrows appear in the display ( ).
S3: not used
The position required to gain access must be defined for each level and will be checked by the meter in any case. The status "does not care" is not possible.
Unless ordered otherwise, all meters are delivered with open switches (OFF = all switches in the down position) It may be defined that access to a certain level will only be granted from the service menu. To enter the service menu the utility seal must be opened. A password may be defined for each access level. In addition, the utility may chose whether a static 8-character password or a coded 7-character password should be used. The password protection may also be disabled for a particular access level. The access to a certain level may be restricted so that it is only granted via selected communication channels. Access is possible via the optical inter-face, the integrated interface (ZxD300/400 AR only) and both communica-tion channels of the communication unit (ZxD300/400 AT only).
Switches protected by the certification seal
Entering the service menu
Passwords
Communication channels
H 71 0200 0038 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Funktionsweise 4.15-7
4.15.4 Security levels and their application
The table below describes all levels with their security attributes and their typical application.
Level Security attributes Access rights / application examples
0
Public Access
without password
without breaking a seal
This access level is always available. All dlms meters can be accessed on this level. All data can be read but there is no write access.
1
Data Collection
with static password
without breaking a seal
Readout of billing data by means of a handheld terminal or possibly by a central station.
All billing data are readable.
Limited write access possible, e.g. time/date.
2
Utility Field Service
with coded password
without breaking a seal
Landis+Gyr Tool required because of coded password
Installation or maintance tasks in the field.
All parameters and all billing data are readable.
Limited write access to settable data is possible, e.g. device addresses, identification numbers, phone numbers etc.
3
Utility Service
without password
breaking the utility seal necessary
Installation or maintenance work in the utility.
All parameters and all billing data are readable.
Write access to settable data is granted, e.g. battery operating time, switching tables etc.
Acce
ss p
ossi
ble
via
dlm
s an
d IE
C pr
otoc
ol
4
Extended Utility Service
without password
breaking the verification seal necessary
Reparameterisation in the utility.
All parameters and all billing data are readable.
Write access to settable and parameterisable data is granted, e.g register clearing, password setting etc.
After the access, a verification is required.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0038 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.15-8 Funktionsweise
Level Security attributes Access rights / application examples
5 with static password Write access for the end user.
All parameters and most billing data are read-able.
6
Remote Data Collection
with static password
without breaking a seal
no access via the optical interface
Readout of billing data by a central station.
All billing data are readable.
Limited write access is possible, e.g. time/date.
7
Remote Service
with static password
without breaking a seal
no access via the optical interface
Installation or maintenance work in connection with a central station.
All parameters and all billing data are readable.
Write access to a limited number of settable data is granted, e.g. switching tables, device addresses, identification numbers, phone numbers etc.
8, 9, A, B Reserved for future expansion.
C
Read Administrator
with static password
without breaking a seal
Allocation of read access rights
All parameter and all billing data are readable.
Read access rights for all lower levels (0 to B) can be allocated.
D
Utility Administrator
with coded password
breaking the verification seal necessary
access via optical interface only
Landis+Gyr Tool required because of coded password
As level 4.
In addition, changes in the utility security system are possible:
Read and write access rights can be adapted and all password can be changed.
No access is granted via telemetering systems.
After the access, a verification is required.
E
Distributor Service
with coded password
breaking the verification seal necessary
access via optical interface only
Landis+Gyr Tool required because of coded password
Service access of the distributor. Identical to level D.
In addition, changing the access rights and the password of the utility administrator is possible.
No access is granted via telemetering systems.
After the access, a verification is required.
Acce
ss p
ossi
ble
only
via
dlm
s pr
otoc
ol
F
Manufacturer Service
special conditions
breaking the verification seal necessary
Extended service access for certified Landis+Gyr service centres.
After the access, a verification is required.
H 71 0200 0038 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Funktionsweise 4.15-9
4.15.5 Allocation of access rights to data and parameter groups
In order to simplify the handling of the access rights, all data and para-meters have been grouped.
Read and write access rights for the various data and parameter groups can be allocated to the individual security levels.
to
Data and parameter groups
Dat
a gr
oup
1
parametized link
Level 0
Level 5
Level 1Level 2Level 3Level 4
Level 14
Level 6to
Manufacturer level
Security level Dat
a gr
oup
2
Dat
a gr
oup
3
Dat
a gr
oup
N
to
Para
met
er g
roup
1
Conf
igur
atio
n an
dca
libra
tion
data
Accessaccordingto specialconditions
Para
met
er g
roup
2
Para
met
er g
roup
3
Para
met
er g
roup
N
Fig. 4.15.2 Example of access rights of the various data and parameter groups
The allocation is defined by the application in the utility and by the national approval regulations. It must be made when ordering the meter as it cannot be changed later on.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0038 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.15-10 Funktionsweise
H 71 0200 0242 - en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL
4.16 Operating messages
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.16-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 30.06.2003 First edition
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Table of contents 4.16-3
Table of contents
4.16 Operating messages ______________________________________ 4.16-5 4.16.1 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.16-5 4.16.2 Recording of operating messages ____________________________ 4.16-6 4.16.3 Sending an SMS message __________________________________ 4.16-8
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.16-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.16-5
4.16 Operating messages This sub-section describes the generation of operating messages and their possible effects (SMS message transmission, display, output contact drive and recording in event log).
Note
Operating messages only from software version B21
Only meters with software version B21 or higher can generate operating messages.
4.16.1 Survey
ZMD300/ZxD400 meters can record important events and forward them as so-called operating messages. Operating messages can be used to report important events to the power supply company to enable it to react accordingly and take appropriate action. They can be signalled in the following ways:
• Transmission of an SMS message (short message) to a specific tele-phone number (e.g. to the mobile phone of a servicing engineer of the power supply company)
• Control of an arrow in the display
• Drive for an output contact
• Recording in the event log
• Driving of energy, demand or operating hours registers
SMScontrol
Recording ofoperatingmessage
Sending SMS via GSM modem*
Arrow indisplay
Registerdrive
Eventlog
* via RS232 interface and external GSM modem or via internal GSM modem of communication unit CU-Gx
Importantevent
Outputcontact
Fig. 4.16.1 Signalling of operating messages
SMS messages can be sent either via an RS232 interface (integrated or in communication unit) via an external GSM modem or also directly via the GSM modem integrated in the communication unit CU-Gx.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.16-6 Function
4.16.2 Recording of operating messages
The power supply company can itself determine by parametrizing which important events are to be recorded as operating messages. The following events can be selected (the event number as defined in the event log is shown in parentheses; refer also to section 4.13.1 "Event log"):
• Battery charge low (5)
• Meter reset performed (8)
• Voltage failure phase L1 (49)
• Voltage failure phase L2 (50)
• Voltage failure phase L3 (51)
• Error "Internal overflow in measuring system" (89)
• Error "Communication blocked" (94)
Note
Value of operating messages
An operating message only states that an important event has taken place. It is not indicated which of the possible sources has led to the message. This can, however, be recorded in the event log by correspond-ing parametrization. Operating messages can be used to send an SMS message to any desired telephone number (see section 4.16.3). When an operating message is recorded, an SMS message is transmitted. This can take a little time depending on the quality of the GSM connection or after a number of dial-ling repeats. Operating messages arriving during this time do not initiate a new SMS message. A new operating message only actuates a further SMS message when one SMS message is fully completed. The recording of an operating message actuates an internal control signal in the meter, which can be used to initiate various meter functions:
• Control of an arrow in the meter display
• Drive for an output contact
• Drive for an energy, demand or operating hours register
• Recording of the operating message in the event log
This internal control signal remains active following the arrival of an oper-ating message, until reset by one of the following actions:
• By a corresponding control instruction, which can be supplied to the meter by the MAP120 service tool. This can, for example, be performed on the spot by the service engineer or via modem by the service department.
• By a reset if the meter is parametrized so that operating messages are reset.
Sending an SMS message
Operation of a meter function
H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.16-7
While the internal control signal is active, further operating messages have no effect. The event log can therefore only record an operating message again, for example, when the preceding message has been reset. The internal control signal is also not reset by a voltage failure. The following diagram shows an example of interaction between operating messages, SMS control and the internal control signal. In this example three SMS messages are sent per operating message (can be parametrized from 1 to 5) at a time interval t (can be parametrized from 1 to 255 mins.).
Operating message recorded
Time t betweendialling repeats(1 - 255 mins)SMS message
is actuated
Internal controlsignal set
Control of an arrow in the display Drive for an output contact Drive for an energy, demand or operating hours register Entry in event log
Further operating messagehas no effect, since anSMS message already sent
SMS messagewas sent
Further operating messageis recorded
Further SMS messageactuated
The internal control signalis not influenced, since thisis already set
Operating message is reset with MAP120 or by a reset- internal control signal is reset- any SMS message in progress is ended
Sending of a test SMS messageto check installation- no dialling repeat- only one transmission test- internal control signal not set
MAP
MAP
Up to threetransmission testsper SMS message
Defective SMS transmissions can be recordedin event log
t t t1 2 3 1 2t
Fig. 4.16.2 Example: meter behaviour with operating messages
Example
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.16-8 Function
4.16.3 Sending an SMS message
Operating messages can be used to send SMS messages via a GSM modem. An SMS message pre-defined by the parametrization is sent to a telephone number similarly pre-defined by the parametrization. For exam-ple the equipment number of the meter can be sent to the mobile phone number of the service department of the power supply company, so that the service department knows that an important event has taken place at the meter specified. The "SMS control" provides the following functions:
• Initializing of the GSM modem used by a corresponding AT instruction, provided it concerns an external GSM modem using no control conduc-tors.
• Transmission of an SMS message pre-defined by the parametrization to any desired telephone number similarly pre-defined by the parametriza-tion. This information is supplied to the GSM modem in the form of an AT instruction.
• If for any reason the GSM modem does not acknowledge a successful SMS transmission (no Acknowledge), three attempts are made to send the SMS message.
• It can be determined by parametrization how many SMS messages are to be sent per operating event (maximum five dialling repeats).
• The time between repeats of the SMS message can also be set by the parametrization (1 to 255 minutes).
• A test SMS message can be sent to check the connection with the service department after installation of the meter.
If there is a voltage failure in the meter shortly after the recording of an operating message, before the SMS message could be fully transmitted, this condition is stored in the meter. When the meter is switched on again, the SMS message is completed following a waiting time of 2 minutes. If, for example, three dialling repeats are parametrized per operating message, but only the first message could be sent before the voltage failure, the two outstanding SMS messages are sent after restoration of the voltage.
If for any reason an SMS message could not be sent (because for example no connection could be made via the GSM network), this can be recorded in the event log depending on the parametrization. Following a faulty SMS transmission the first successful SMS transmission (e.g. after restoration of operating readiness of the GSM network) can similarly be recorded in the event log.
SMS control
H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.16-9
In ZxD300/400xR meters with an integral RS232 interface an external GSM modem can be connected to this interface to send an SMS message.
GSM modem
Integrated RS232 interface
Fig. 4.16.3 Sending SMS messages by ZxD300/400xR meters In ZxD300/400xT meters a communication unit CU-Gx with internal GSM modem, or CU-Ax or CU-Bx with RS232 interface, to which an external GSM modem is connected, can be selected for sending SMS messages.
GSM modem
Communication unitwith RS232 interface
Communication unitCU-Gx with GSM modem
Fig. 4.16.4 Sending SMS messages by ZxD300/400xT meters
The following boundary conditions must be satisfied to ensure communica-tion between the meter and an external GSM modem for this application:
• The meter must communicate with the external GSM modem via an RS232 interface.
• The external GSM modem must be operated in so-called "transparent mode" if:
- the external GSM modem is connected to an RS232 interface without control conductors (with integrated communication for the ZxD300/ 400xR)
- or if the control conductors of the RS232 interface of the communi-cation unit are not used.
• The maximum bit rate at the RS232 interface must be set by para-metrization to the communication speed of the external GSM modem.
• The RS232 interface must have either the auto-detection function parametrized for the bit rate or in case of communication according to IEC 62056-21 the start bit rate parametrized the same as the maximum bit rate.
ZxD300/400xR
ZxD300/400xT
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.16-10 Function
• The AT instructions used must have 7 bits fixed, even parity.
Further information concerning operation of ZxD meters with GSM modems can be found in the following documents:
• User manuals for the various communication units:
- CU-Ax: .............................................................. H 71 0200 0044 en
- CU-Bx: .............................................................. H 71 0200 0045 en
- CU-Gx: .............................................................. H 71 0200 0046 en
• Basic information for communication applications ............................... H 71 0200 0145 en
• Detailed application notes for numerous reference applications with various communication units for different transmission media:
- Point-to-point connection with internal GSM modem .......................................... H 71 0200 0147 en
- Point-to-point connection with external GSM modem "ZDUE-GSM-PLUS III" ....... H 71 0200 0149 en
- Point-to-point connection with external GSM modem "Metcom T" (RS232) ......... H 71 0200 0150 en
If an external GSM modem is connected in transparent mode to the RS232 interface of the meter (for ZxDxxxxR or if the control conductors of the communication unit CU-Ax or CU-Bx for ZxDxxxxT are not used for control of the GSM modem), the GSM modem must be initialized by an AT instruc-tion. Any desired AT instruction of maximum length 40 characters can be parametrized in the meter for this initializing. The initializing can also consist of several, individual AT instructions, which are concluded in each case with <0D> (carriage return). With the MAP120 service tool the initial-izing instruction can be parametrized in the meter. The valid initializing instructions for a specific GSM modem can be found in the manual for the relevant GSM modem.
Note
Treatment of AT instructions
AT instructions are treated as ASCII character sequence (string).
The initializing instruction for a GSM modem generally consists of two AT instructions as shown by the following example:
ATZ<0D>AT+CMGF=1<0D>
The two AT instructions have the following significance:
ATZ Reset of GSM modem (previous initializings are cancelled)
AT+CMGF=1 The GSM modem is operated in string mode
Initializing external GSM modem with an AT instruction
H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Function 4.16-11
Note
Parametrizing communication units
When using communication unit CU-Gx (with integral GSM modem) or communication unit CU-Ax or CU-Bx (RS232 interface with control con-ductors and external GSM modem) the GSM modem is initialized by the corresponding control signals of the communication unit. The communica-tion unit must be parametrized for this purpose (see relevant application notes). In this case no AT instruction must be parametrized to initialize the GSM modem in the meter, but a blank initializing string must be parametrized in the meter. The telephone number to which the SMS message is to be sent and the text of the SMS message are combined in a single AT instruction. This can be parametrized in the meter with the MAP120 service tool. This AT instruction can consist of maximum 60 characters with the following struc-ture:
AT+CMGS="+41vvnnnnnnn"<0D>xxxxxxxxx<1A> The individual parts of the AT instruction have the following significance:
AT Introduction of AT instruction (Attention)
+CMGS= Communication instruction for the GSM modem
"+41vvnnnnnnn" Telephone number of SMS recipient with country code (+41 for Switzerland), code vv without pre-ceding zero (e.g. 79) and 7-digit call number nnnnnnn (e.g. 1234567). The telephone number must be limited by initial and concluding characters.
<0D> Carriage Return
xxxxxxxxx Text of SMS message. This can comprise any desired sequence of characters (without initial and concluding characters) with the equipment number of the meter generally entered. A special code defined by the power supply company, which for example defines the current location of the meter, can also be entered.
<1A> Concluding character (CTRL-Z)
The waiting time between transmission of the telephone number and the SMS message to the GSM modem is one second. The waiting time for acknowledgement from the GSM modem that the SMS has been sent is 15 seconds.
The telephone number and the text of the SMS message are thereby permanently stored in the meter and can only be modified by re-parametrization. It is not therefore possible to send different SMS messages dependent on one event. The SMS recipient, for example the service department of the power supply company, can see from the meter number sent or the code of the power supply company for the location of the meter, which meter has sent the SMS message and can then take appropriate action.
Determination of telephone number and SMS message
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 4.16-12 Function
Following installation, for example, a test SMS message can be sent with the aid of the MAP120 service tool to check the correct function of the meter and GSM modem. The installer can send any SMS message to any desired telephone number (for example to his own mobile phone) to verify that the installation is configured correctly.
The AT instruction for the test SMS message has the same structure as the AT instruction previously described for specifying the telephone number and the SMS message. The test SMS message is only sent once, however, and in the event that the GSM modem is not ready or cannot make con-nection in the GSM network, no further attempts at transmission are made. The SMS controller generates a status report, which can be read out at any time with the MAP120 service tool. The current status of the SMS controller can be checked in this way. The status report can contain the following information:
• SMS transmission was successful (1)
• SMS transmission was not successful (0)
• GSM modem is busy (2)
• Incompatible communication unit: communication unit cannot send an SMS message (4)
Test SMS message
Status report of SMS message
H 71 0200 0035 e en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL
5 Control elements and displays
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 5-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 26.07.1999 First edition a 17.04.2000 Text and illustration adaptations after internal revision b 29.09.2000 Changes on pages 1, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12 and 13 c 28.02.2002 Document also valid for ZxD310CT d 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 e 30.06.2003 Chapter 5.3.1: Reference added to possibility of limiting to active values
in the rolling operating display.
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Table of contents 5-3
Table of contents
5 Control elements and displays__________________________5-5 5.1 Control elements ____________________________________________ 5-5 5.1.1 Display buttons _____________________________________________ 5-5 5.1.2 Control of display via optical interface ___________________________ 5-5 5.1.3 Reset button _______________________________________________ 5-6 5.2 Liquid crystal display _________________________________________ 5-7 5.2.1 Introduction ________________________________________________ 5-7 5.2.2 Basic layout ________________________________________________ 5-7 5.2.3 Index system _______________________________________________ 5-9 5.3 Types of display____________________________________________ 5-10 5.3.1 Operating display___________________________________________ 5-10 5.3.2 Display list ________________________________________________ 5-11 5.3.3 Service list ________________________________________________ 5-14 5.4 Optical test output __________________________________________ 5-16
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 5-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Control elements and displays 5-5
5 Control elements and displays This chapter describes the appearance, layout and function of all operating elements and displays of the meters ZMD300xx and ZxD400xx.
Note
Illustrations
The illustrations of the face plate and display in this section always show the ZMD300Cx or ZxD400Cx combimeter (with additional optical test output for reactive energy, together with direction of reactive power and quadrant display).
5.1 Control elements The ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx meters have the two display buttons "down" and "up" and a reset button as conventional operating elements. The display can also be controlled with the aid of a light source via the optical interface.
5.1.1 Display buttons
The two display buttons "down" and "up" are placed on the main face plate (top) on the right of the liquid crystal display.
Landis+Gyr Dialog
Cl. 1500 impkWh
Readout
Three-phase four-wire meterZMD410CT41.4207 No 69 832 1383 x 230/400 V 100/5 A 50 Hz
1999
T1 T2 T3 SET Test
Display button"up"
Cl. 1 impkvarh
Display button "down"
Fig. 5.1 Display buttons
By pressing the lower display button "down", the display changes to the next value in the list. By pressing the upper display button "up", the display changes to the previous value (refer also to 5.3.2 "Display list").
5.1.2 Control of display via optical interface
All meters of the ZxD series have an "optical button" in addition to the "up" and "down" display buttons. The optical interface serves to receive a light signal, e.g. generated by a torch. The light signal acts like the "down" display button and controls the display in one direction from one value to the next. This type of display control only functions when voltage is supplied to the meter.
The reader can also control the display at a distance from the meter depending on the light intensity from the source, e.g. through a protective glass disc in front of the meter.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 5-6 Control elements and displays
5.1.3 Reset button
The reset button is situated to the right of the battery compartment under the front door. To permit operation of the reset button the front door must be opened and therefore the factory seal removed.
The reset button is normally used to perform a manual reset. If the display check is displayed, however, pressing of the reset button produces the service menu (refer also to 5.3.3 "Service list").
Reset button
Communication unit(only with ZMD300xT or ZxD400xT)
Batterycompartment
R
Fig. 5.2 Reset button under front door
H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Control elements and displays 5-7
5.2 Liquid crystal display
5.2.1 Introduction
The meters ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx are provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD).
The display can be provided with background lighting for easier reading (optional). This is switched on by pressing one of the display buttons and is extinguished automatically after a short time if no further button is pressed.
5.2.2 Basic layout
The basic layout shows all the indication possibilities of the liquid crystal display.
12 3 4 5
6 7
8
1 2
Fig. 5.3 Basic layout of the liquid crystal display (LCD)
1 Active power direction (+P: import, -P: export) 2 Reactive power direction (not used with ZMD300Ax / ZxD400Ax) 3 Phase voltages (flash if rotating field reversed) 4 Battery status (charge voltage) 5 Units field 6 Index field (8 digits) 7 Value field (8 digits) 8 12 arrow symbols for status information (e.g. tariffs)
Shows always the sum of the three phases:
positive active energy direction (imported from power company)
negative active energy direction (exported to power company)
negative active energy direction of individual phases (second arrow flashes), but only in the M circuit (ZMD300xx / ZMD400xx).
Active power direction
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 5-8 Control elements and displays
Indicates for combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx always the sum of the three phases (not used for active energy meters ZMD300Ax / ZxD400Ax).
positive reactive energy direction
negative reactive energy direction
Indicates for combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx in which quadrants the present measurement is made (not used for active energy meters ZMD300Ax / ZxD400Ax):
1. Quadrant
2. Quadrant
3. Quadrant
4. Quadrant
Phase voltages Indication of presence of phase voltages.
If the rotating field corresponds to that given by the parametrizing, symbols L1, L2 and L3 are continuously lit. Otherwise they flash every second.
Battery condition The symbol appears if the charge voltage of the
battery fitted is too low (provided the meter is parametrized as "fitted with battery").
Units field The following units are shown:
W, var, VA, k..., M..., ...h, V, A, h, Hz, m³ (var and VA only for combimeters)
Index field
Up to 8-digit indices are displayed, which define the value in the value field.
Value field
Up to 8-digit values are displayed.
Arrow symbols An arrow symbol is an additional status indica-
tion for tariffs, reset block, test mode, etc. The arrow points to a status description on the face plate.
Reactive power direction
Quadrant display
H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Control elements and displays 5-9
5.2.3 Index system
The information concerning which data are shown in the display is made with an index system and is supported by the unit over the value field.
The 8-digit index field permits all previously known index systems such as DIN, LG, VEOe, OBIS, etc.
The B:C.D.E.F structure applies to OBIS (Object Identification System):
B Defines the channel number, i.e. the number of the input of a meter-ing equipment having several inputs for the measurement of energy of the same or different types (e.g. in data concentrators, registration units). This enables data from different sources to be identified.
C Defines the abstract or physical data items related to the information source concerned, e.g. active power, reactive power, apparent power, cosφ, current or voltage.
D Defines types, or the result of the processing of physical quantities according to various specific algorithms. The algorithms can deliver energy and demand quantities as well as other physical quantities.
E Defines the further processing of measurement results to tariff registers, according to the tariffs in use. For abstract data or for measurement results for which tariffs are not relevant, this value group can be used for further classification.
F Defines the storage of data according to different billing periods. Where this is not relevant, this value group can be used for further classification.
To simplify the reading in the index field, individual parts of the OBIS code can be omitted. The abstract or physical data C and type of data D must be shown. 1.8.0 1 = Active energy import (all phases)
8 = Status
0 = Total
0.9.1 Local time
Reference is made for examples to the following display list and the readout log (refer to chapter 6 "Communication interfaces").
Examples
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 5-10 Control elements and displays
5.3 Types of display The ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx has the following three types of display:
• Operating display The values specified by the parametrizing are shown as a rolling display in the operating display. The display is always in operating mode when the display buttons are not operated. The meter returns automatically from the display list to the operating display after a defined time. This can consists of one or more values.
• Display list This comprises all values, which appear in the display after pressing a button. The values themselves and also the sequence can be parametrized. The display buttons permit scrolling up and down in the list.
• Service list The user can set the meter to service mode by pressing the reset button starting from the display check. An extended display list – the service list – is available there with additional values.
5.3.1 Operating display
The values always displayed are considered the operating display. This can be parametrized as fixed display (only one value present, e.g. the present tariff) or as rolling display (several values alternate at a fixed rate, e.g. every 15 seconds).
running mean value with status of integrating period
Fig. 5.4 Example of a fixed display
Note
Limiting to active values in rolling operating display
In meters with software version B21 or higher it is possible by parametrization to limit the rolling display to active values. This helps to keep the rolling display clear, e.g. in meters with numerous energy and demand registers. The meter can generate an error message on the basis of self-tests. According to parametrization, this can be permanently included in the operating display. In the event of a fatal error, it replaces the normal operating display and the meter no longer operates.
Fig. 5.5 Example of an error message (unsufficent battery voltage)
In case of an error message the procedure described in chapter 9 "Error measages and measures in event of faults" should be followed.
Error message
H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Control elements and displays 5-11
5.3.2 Display list
Operating display
Display menu
Service menu
Display list
Data profile
Event log
,
+
R= press "up" button briefly (< 2 s)
= press "down" button briefly (< 2 s)
= press "up" button longer (> 2 s)
= press "down" button longer (> 2 s)
= press reset button
R
,
Value 1
Value 2
Value n
End
Values
+
Values
Values
,
+
, *
, *
+ = together
, = as required (or)
, *
, *
, *
, *
,
* = main values only
,
End
Display check
Fig. 5.6 Display list survey Brief operation (< 2s) of the display button "down" or "up" causes change of the operating display, e.g.:
to the display check:
All segments of the display are operated here. The index and value fields should be checked each time for missing segments. This can prevent incorrect readings.
Display check
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 5-12 Control elements and displays
Pressing the display button "down" or "up" again briefly changes to the display menu or directly to the display list. The first menu item appears, e.g. "Display list" (standard data):
The menu item only appears when several menu items exist. Otherwise direct entry is made to the display list.
The next menu item appears for every further brief operation of the "down" display button, e.g. "Data profile", "Event log" etc. The first menu item appears again after the last item.
The preceding menu item is displayed again by briefly pressing the "up" display button.
Both display buttons ("down" and "up") must be pressed simultaneously to return to the operating display from the display menu. The first value of the list associated with the present menu is displayed by pressing the display button "down" or "up" for longer (at least 2 seconds), normally the error message:
The next list value appears for every further brief operation of the "down" display button. Brief operation of the "up" button again displays the preceding value. The sequence of values in the list is determined by the parametrization.
A rapid run is started by holding down the display button "down" or "up" (at least 2 seconds). The main values of the list are then displayed while the button remains pressed, but no stored values.
Examples of values in a display list:
Reset counter
Date of resetting
stored value 03 (March)
Cumulated maximum demand
active power
Display menu
Value display
H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Control elements and displays 5-13
Active energy
present status
Reactive energy
present status
Battery hours counter
Status of signals at control terminals
Present voltage
phase 1
Present current
phase 1
Number of total voltage failures
To return to the menu level from the list at the end of the display list press the display button "down" or "up" for longer (at least 2 seconds).
Both display buttons ("down" and "up") must be pressed simultaneously to return to the operating display from the list.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 5-14 Control elements and displays
The "Load profile" menu item for selection in the display menu (denoted P.01) is shown as follows:
The first value of the load profile is displayed by pressing the display button "down" or "up" for longer (at least 2 seconds). Navigation within the load profile display takes place as described in section 4.13.2 "Load profile".
5.3.3 Service list
Operating display
Service menu
Display menu
Service list
Set mode
Others
,
+
R= press "up" button briefly (< 2 s)
= press "down" button briefly (< 2 s)
= press "up" button longer (> 2 s)
= press "down" button longer (> 2 s)
= press reset button
R
,
Value 1
Value 2
Value n
End
Values
+
Values
Values
,
+
, *
, *
+ = together
, = as required (or)
, *
, *
, *
, *
,
* = main values only
,
End
Display check
Fig. 5.7 Service mode survey
Load profile
H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Control elements and displays 5-15
Pressing the reset button during the display check changes the display to the service menu or directly to the service list. The first menu item appears, e.g. "Service list" (service data):
The menu item only appears if there are several items present. Otherwise direct entry is made to the service list.
The next menu item appears for every further brief operation of the "down" display button, e.g. "Set mode", "Test mode on/off", etc. The first item appears again following the last menu item "End".
The preceding menu item appears again by pressing the "up" button briefly.
Both display buttons ("down" and "up") must be pressed simultaneously to return to the operating display from the service menu. The first value of the list associated with the present menu is displayed by pressing the display button "down" or "up" for longer (at least 2 seconds) (as for the display list)
The next list value appears for every further brief operation of the "down" display button. Brief operation of the "up" button again displays the preceding value. The sequence of values in the list is determined by the parametrization.
A rapid run is started by holding down the display button "down" or "up" (at least 2 seconds). The main values of the list are then displayed while the button remains pressed, but no stored values.
To return to the menu level from the list at the end of the display list press the display button "down" or "up" for longer (at least 2 seconds).
Both display buttons ("down" and "up") must be pressed simultaneously to return to the operating display from the list. Values can be changed in the value display of the set mode with the aid of the reset button and display buttons (for setting time and date, identifica-tion numbers, battery hours counter, etc.). The procedure is described under "Changing values in set mode" in chapter 8.4. The "Event profile" menu item for selection in the service or display menu (denoted P.98) is shown as follows:
The first value of the load profile is displayed by pressing the display button "down" or "up" for longer (at least 2 seconds). Navigation within the event profile display takes place as described in section 4.13.1 "Event log".
Service menu
Value display
Set mode
Event log
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 5-16 Control elements and displays
5.4 Optical test output The optical test outputs – one for active energy in all meters and a second for reactive energy in combimeters – are fitted in the main face plate above the liquid crystal display.
Landis+Gyr Dialog
Cl. 1500 impkWh
Readout
Three-phase four-wire meterZMD410CT41.4207 No 69 832 1383 x 230/400 V 100/5 A 50 Hz
2003
T1 T2 T3
Cl. 1 impkvarh
Optical test outputactive energy
Optical test outputreactive energy(combimeters only)
SET Test Fig. 5.8 Optical test outputs
The optical test outputs are used for testing the meter. They transmit visible red pulses corresponding to the current measured values (active and reactive energy). See also chapter 8 "Maintenance and service".
H 71 0200 0247 - en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT USER MANUAL
6 Communication interfaces
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual 6-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 31.03.2003 First edition
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+GyrTable of contents 6-3
Table of contents
6 Communication interfaces ____________________________ 6-5 6.1 Survey ____________________________________________________ 6-5 6.2 Optical interface_____________________________________________ 6-6 6.3 S0 interface ________________________________________________ 6-6 6.4 RS232 interface _____________________________________________ 6-7 6.5 RS485 interface _____________________________________________ 6-7 6.6 CS interface ________________________________________________ 6-8 6.7 M-Bus interface _____________________________________________ 6-8 6.8 Possibilities for data readout ___________________________________ 6-9 6.8.1 Data readout via optical interface _______________________________ 6-9 6.8.2 Readout to IEC 62056-21 (former IEC 1107) _____________________ 6-10 6.8.3 Readout to DLMS ___________________________________________ 6-12 6.9 Further information sources about communication interfaces ________ 6-13
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual 6-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+GyrCommunication interfaces 6-5
6 Communication interfaces This section describes the functions and application possibilities of all communication interfaces of the ZMD300xT and ZxD400xT meters and indicates the possibilities for data readout.
6.1 Survey The ZMD300xT and ZxD400xT meters have an optical interface for communication on the spot via a read head using a wide range of communication interfaces.
• for remote scanning of meters (RS232, RS485, CS, M-Bus, PSTN modem, GSM modem etc.) or
• for recording metering pulses for other physical media, such as water, gas or heat (S0 interface).
The communication devices are accommodated in an easily exchanged communication unit, which is plugged in under the front door of the meter and secured by a factory seal. It can be fitted and removed at any time in the field without touching the calibration seal.
An initial fitting as well as retrofitting without re-parametrizing of the meters is possible with any version of communication unit. For fitting and removal of the already parametrized communication units the installation personnel do not require any special knowledge of communications. Modern plug connections ensure a rapid and faultless connection of the communication units.
AC
DC
99999
001-2
Landis+Gyr Dialog
CU-G4
CU-G4
Klemmendeckel
Terminal cover
Couvre borne
CON
Rx
Tx
100-230V~
+ - + -
S01
S02
RS48
5
Fig. 6.1 Simple fitting of the communication unit
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual 6-6 Communication interfaces
The following versions of communication units (CU) are currently available, divided into five basic versions:
• Communication units CU-Ax with RS232, CS and S0 interfaces
• Communication units CU-Bx with RS485, RS232 and S0 interfaces
• Communication units CU-Dx with M-Bus
• Communication units CU-Mx with PSTN modem(V.22bis or V.34), RS485 and S0 interfaces
• Communication units CU-Gx with GSM modem, RS232, RS485 and S0 interfaces
The relevant version is designated with a number inserted instead of "x" (e.g. CU-A1, CU-B2, CU-M4, CU-G5).
6.2 Optical interface The optical interface to IEC 62056-21 is a serial, bi-directional interface. It is situated at top right on the main face plate (see also chapter 3 "Mechanical constuction") and serves:
• for automatic data recording on the spot by means of suitable acquisition unit (hand-held terminal) (see section 6.8.1)
• for performing service functions, e.g. to input formatted commands (see section 8.3)
• as "optical key", i.e. as receiver of a light signal, e.g. generated by a flashlight acting like the "down" call-up button (refer also to section 5.1.2 "Display control via optical interface").
• for communication with a Landis+Gyr MAP120 service tool or a Landis+Gyr MAP190 parametrization editor tool.
The technical data for the optical interface are given in section 2.2.12 "Serial interface".
6.3 S0 interface The S0 interface (pulse input) serves to accept external pulse transmitters (e.g. other meters with transmit contact for fixed valency pulses) for processing in the meter. 2 S0 interfaces are provided in each of the communication units CU-A1, CU-B1, CU-D2, CU-M1, CU-G4 and CU-G5 (see corresponding user manual).
The technical data for the S0 interface are given in the user manuals for the above-mentioned communication units with S0 interface.
Versions
H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+GyrCommunication interfaces 6-7
6.4 RS232 interface The RS232 interface is an asymmetric, serial, asynchronous, bi-directional interface. It is present in the communication units CU-A1, CU-A2, CU-A5, CU-B1, CU-B4, CU-G3 and CU-G5 (see corresponding user manual) and serves:
• for the connection of an external modem (intelligent or transparent), e.g. for remote reading of meter data or performance of service functions from a central station
• to provide a direct connection to the RS232 interface of a computer.
The RS232 interface of the communication unit is available in 2 different versions:
• as basic version without control lines for the connection of an external modem with sufficient intelligence of its own or
• as extended version with control lines for the connection of a transparent external modem. The use of this version has the following advantages:
- Application of commercially available modem possible without difficulty
- Maximum possible baud rate can be used without danger of buffer overflow
- Limiting of maximum connection and idle time possible
- Optimum behaviour with poor connections
- Support of time-windows.
The technical data for the RS232 interface are given in the user manuals for the above-mentioned communication units with RS232 interface.
6.5 RS485 interface The RS485 interface is a serial bi-directional interface. It is present in the communication units CU-B1, CU-B2, CU-B4, CU-M1, CU-M4, CU-G1 and CU-G4 (see corresponding user manual).
Up to 32 locally installed meters can be connected for example via the RS485 interface to a bus system and then centrally to a modem, in order to read out the meter data or perform service functions (such as setting start values, time/date, etc.).
The technical data for the RS485 interface are given in the user manuals for the above-mentioned communication units with RS485 interface.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual 6-8 Communication interfaces
6.6 CS interface The CS interface is a serial, bi-directional, passive current interface (current loop). It is present in communication units CU-A1, CU-A2 and CU-A4 (see corresponding user manual).
Up to 4 locally installed meters can be connected via the CS interface to a bus system and then centrally to a modem, in order to read out the meter data or perform service functions (such as setting start values, time/date, etc.).
The technical data for the CS interface are given in the user manuals for the above-mentioned communication units with CS interface.
6.7 M-Bus interface The serial M-bus interface is present in communication unit CU-D2 (see corresponding user manual).
With the M-Bus interface up to 250 devices (electricity, water, gas or heat meters) can be connected via a repeater to a communication path in order to read out the meter data or perform service functions (such as setting start values, time/date, etc.).
The use of the M-Bus physical layers (the M-Bus protocol is not used) has compared with the customary use of a RS485 bus the advantage, that an already existing M-Bus infrastructure can be further used, i.e. no new cabling is necessary.
The technical data for the M-bus interface are given in the user manual for the communication unit CU-D2.
H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+GyrCommunication interfaces 6-9
6.8 Possibilities for data readout The power supply company can record the data stored in the meter on the spot at any time in two ways:
• Reading the liquid crystal display of the meter. Only those data can be recorded which appear in the rolling operating display or can be selected with the call-up button.
• Automatic data readout via the optical interface according to 6.8.1 with the aid of a hand held terminal) or other readout device (e.g. laptop). Further data are then accessible depending on the parametrization.
Note
Readout data
For readout to IEC 62056-21 all data determined by the parametrization are read out in the specified sequence.
For readout according to DLMS (Device Language Message Specification) the data requested by the readout unit are read out.
If the meter is fitted with the appropriate communication unit (see associated separate operating instruction) remote scanning of the meter data is also possible.
6.8.1 Data readout via optical interface
Procedure:
1. Start the hand held terminal (according to the details in the associated operating instructions).
2. Connect the cable of the reading head to the hand held terminal.
3. Place the reading head in the "Readout" indentation on the plastic viewing window of the meter. The reading head cable must point towards the terminal cover (when mounted vertically downwards). The reading head is held magnetically.
4. Start the data readout on the hand held terminal (according to the details in the associated operating instructions).
5. Remove the reading head from the meter again after completing the readout.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual 6-10 Communication interfaces
6.8.2 Readout to IEC 62056-21 (former IEC 1107)
The data read out according to IEC 62056-21 are recorded in the form shown below. The scope and sequence of values in the log is determined by the parametrization.
Log example Significance
/LGZ4\2ZMD4104100 Designation of meter (reply on transmit request)
F.F (00000000) Error message
0.0.1 (417242) 1st identification number
0.1.0 (28) Number of resets
0.1.2.04 (98-05-01 00:00) Time of last reset
1.2.1 (26068.7*kW) P max cumulated Tariff 1
1.2.2 (15534.8*kW) P max cumulated Tariff 2
1.6.1 (192.4*kW)(00-05-06 10:45) P max present Tariff 1
1.6.1*04 (202.4)(00-04-22 09:30) with April stored value Tariff 1
1.6.2 (086.7*kW)(00-05-04 22:30) P max present Tariff 2
1.6.2*04 (100.9)(00-04-14 23:00) with April stored value Tariff 2
1.8.1 (0244948*kWh) Active energy (import) Tariff 1
1.8.1*04 (0234520) with April stored value Tariff 1
1.8.2 (0082520*kWh) Active energy (import) Tariff 2
1.8.2*04 (0078197) with April stored value Tariff 2
5.8.1 (0106103*kvarh) Reactive energy (inductive) Tariff 1
5.8.1*04 (0100734) with April stored value Tariff 1
5.8.2 (0039591*kvarh) Reactive energy (inductive) Tariff 2
5.8.2*04 (0036152) with April stored value Tariff 2
1.8.0 (0327468*kWh) Total active energy
5.8.0 (0145694*kvarh) Total reactive energy (inductive)
8.8.0 (0001452*kvarh) Total reactive energy (capacitive)
0.9.1 (14:18:06) Time-of-day of readout
0.9.2 (00-05-20) Date of readout
C.7.0 (00087) No. of voltage failures of all phases
C.72.0 (00157) Number of undervoltages
C.73.0 (00000) Number of overvoltages
C.74.0 (00306) Number of overloads (overcurrent)
C.3.0 (500) Active pulse constant
C.3.1 (500) Reactive pulse constant
C.2.1 (00-03-26) Date of last parametrization
! End of log
H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+GyrCommunication interfaces 6-11
The power supply company can select by parametrizing between a standard identification or its own identification. The standard identification has the following structure:
/LGZ... Manufacturer (Landis+Gyr)
/LGZ 4... Baud rate 4 = 4800 Baud
/LGZ4 \2... Extended communication possibility 2 = DLMS-compatible meter
/LGZ4\2 ZMD410... Meter Type of measuring unit
/LGZ4\2ZMD410 41... Basic version tariff section
/LGZ4\2ZMD41041 00... Additional functions (RCR, supplementary power supply)
/LGZ4\2ZMD4104100 .B14 Software version
Stored values The hyphen following the identification number and the tariff (1.6.1) denotes the type of resetting:
e.g. 1.6.1*04 *04 Resetting made internally or remote controlled
e.g. 1.6.1&04 &04 Resetting performed manually or with reset button R
Identification by the power supply company itself uses an identification number. ID1.1 (designation of ownership by the power supply company), ID1.2 (any desired number) or ID2.1 (serial number) are available. The identification is comprised as follows in this case:
/LGZ... Manufacturer (Landis+Gyr)
/LGZ 4... Baud rate 4 = 4800 Baud
/LGZ4 \2... Extended communication possibility 2 = DLMS-compatible meter
/LGZ4\2 \B14... Meter Software version
/LGZ4\2\B14 12345678 Identification number specified by parametrizing (maximum 8 characters)
Notes
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual 6-12 Communication interfaces
6.8.3 Readout to DLMS
While the readout according to IEC 62056-21 uses a protocol determined in advance, readout to DLMS enables the power supply company to configure the values to be read out individually. The company therefore has systematic access to specific values without being influenced by other values not required. Various meter manufacturers – including Landis+Gyr – together with related organizations, have compiled the language specification DLMS (Device Language Message Specification) and undertaken to use this in their equipment (meters, tariff units, systems, etc.). The objective of DLMS is to use a common language for data exchange in the energy measurement and other sectors. In addition to end units such as meters, tariff units, etc. DLMS also concerns the interfaces, transmission channels and system software. DLMS can be compared to sending a letter: the sender writes the address of the recipient on the letter and hands it to the post office for transport. The way in which the postal department transports the letter is of no consequence to the sender and receiver. The only important thing is that the address of the recipient is clearly shown and that the letter is received, read and it can be seen from whom the letter originates.
Units with DLMS operate in a similar way. They provide the values - termed items - required by the receiver (e.g. control centre) and pass them via interface to the transport medium (channel). How the values reach the recipient is again immaterial for both parties. DLMS is an item-oriented language. The DLMS items
• have an unmistakable name in the form of the EDIS identification number
• contain the value in an exactly defined form and
• are configured in a similarly exactly defined format.
Items of this kind are number of resets with date and time, cumulative maxima, rolling mean values, maxima, energy statuses, associated stored values, etc.
The sender feeds these items to a transport medium, e.g. the telephone network. This transmits them to the receiver, so that the items are received in the same form as supplied by the sender.
DLMS specification
Objective
Principle
DLMS items
H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+GyrCommunication interfaces 6-13
6.9 Further information sources about communication interfaces
More detailed information about Landis+Gyr Dialog communication solutions can be found in the following documents.
• Product information for the various communication units:
- CU-Ax: ............................................................. H 71 0200 0099 en
- CU-Bx: ............................................................. H 71 0200 0100 en
- CU-Dx: ............................................................. H 71 0200 0231 en
- CU-Mx: ............................................................. H 71 0200 0101 en
- CU-Gx: ............................................................. H 71 0200 0105 en
• User manuals for the various communication units:
- CU-Ax: ............................................................. H 71 0200 0044 en
- CU-Bx: ............................................................. H 71 0200 0045 en
- CU-Dx: ............................................................. H 71 0200 0232 en
- CU-Mx: ............................................................. H 71 0200 0047 en
- CU-Gx: ............................................................. H 71 0200 0046 en
• Basic information for communication applications .............................. H 71 0200 0145 en
• Detailed application notes for numerous reference applications with various communication units for different transmission media:
- Point-to-point connection with internal PSTN modem ....................................... H 71 0200 0146 en
- Point-to-point connection with external PSTN modem "US Robotics 56k" ........... H 71 0200 0148 en
- Point-to-point connection with external PSTN modem "ELSA MicroLink ISDN" .... H 71 0200 0151 en
- Point-to-point connection with internal GSM modem ......................................... H 71 0200 0147 en
- Point-to-point connection with external GSM modem "ZDUE-GSM-PLUS III" ...... H 71 0200 0149 en
- Point-to-point connection with external GSM modem "Metcom T" (RS232) ........ H 71 0200 0150 en
- Point-to-point connection with external GSM modem "Metcom T" (CS) .............. H 71 0200 0153 en
- Point-to-point connection with external IP converter "MetcomTE2" ................... H 71 0200 0152 en
- Multiple connections with RS485 interfaces ....................................... H 71 0200 0154 en
- Multiple connections with CS interfaces ............................................. H 71 0200 0155 en
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual 6-14 Communication interfaces
- Multiple connections with M-Bus interfaces ........................................ H 71 0200 0156 en
The range of application notes of this kind available is being continually enlarged.
All these documents as well as advisory services are available from the competent representative of Landis+Gyr Ltd.
H 71 0200 0061 f en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 USER MANUAL
7 Installation and commissioning
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual 7-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 26.07.1999 First edition a 17.04.2000 Text adaptations after internal revision b 29.09.2000 Various corrections c 28.02.2002 ZMD310CT with I max of 120 A d 02.05.2002 ZMD310AT included e 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 f 30.06.2003 Section 7.7 "Commissioning and functional check" supplemented by
check of communication device with test SMS message
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Table of contents 7-3
Table of contents
7 Installation and commissioning ________________________7-5 7.1 Introduction ________________________________________________ 7-5 7.2 Material and tools required ____________________________________ 7-5 7.3 Basic information for connecting meter __________________________ 7-6 7.3.1 Connection with 3 phases and neutral ___________________________ 7-6 7.3.2 Connection with 3 phases without neutral (Aron circuit) _____________ 7-6 7.4 Mounting the meter __________________________________________ 7-7 7.5 Connecting meter ___________________________________________ 7-9 7.6 Check of connections________________________________________ 7-12 7.7 Commissioning and functional check ___________________________ 7-13
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual 7-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Installation and commissioning 7-5
7 Installation and commissioning This chapter describes the installation and connection of meters for direct connection. In addition, the necessary steps for checking the connections, commissioning of the meter and the final functional check are described.
Danger
Dangerous voltage
Dangers can arise from live electrical installations to which the meters are connected. Touching live parts is dangerous to life. All safety information should therefore be strictly observed without fail.
7.1 Introduction The following personal and technical conditions must be fulfilled for installation and commissioning of the meters:
• The work described below must only be performed by technically quali-fied and suitably trained persons.
• These persons must be familiar with and observe the normal local safety regulations.
• Strictly observe the details in chapter 1 "Safety", in particular the safety regulations, as well as all information concerning safe operation in this chapter.
• Before starting work check that the material and tools required are all present (as in chapter 7.2).
7.2 Material and tools required The following material and tools are required for installation of the meters:
• Correct meter (according to type designation and characteristic data on the face plate) with intact meter seal (calibration seals)
• Correct meter connection diagram (on the rear side of the tariff face plate)
• Fixing screws for fitting the meters on meter boards or similar device
• Company seals
• Screwdriver suitable for fixing screws
• Size 1 screwdriver for screwless spring-loaded terminals
• Screwdriver suitable for thrust screws of phase connections
• Sealing pliers for company own seals
• Drilling machine for fixing holes if necessary
• Phase tester or universal measuring instrument
• Buzzer
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual 7-6 Installation and commissioning
7.3 Basic information for connecting meter It is recommended to use the following circuits whenever possible for connecting the meter to the various voltage levels.
7.3.1 Connection with 3 phases and neutral
1 2 3 4 6 7 9 10 11 12Consumerfuses
L2 N
Loads
Connectingfuses
L1 L3
Fig. 7.1 Connection with 3 phases and neutral The neutral is normally looped through terminals 10 and 12. Some power supply companies, however, make a simple connection between terminal 10 or 12 and the neutral. This avoids possible contact errors in the neutral conductor.
7.3.2 Connection with 3 phases without neutral (Aron circuit)
A version ZFD300xx for the rarely encountered three-phase networks without neutral with 3 x 230 V is not foreseen.
Neutral
H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Installation and commissioning 7-7
7.4 Mounting the meter
Danger
Dangerous voltage on conductors
The connecting conductors at the point of installation must be voltage-free for installation of the meter. Contact with live components is dangerous to life. The relevant preliminary fuses should therefore be removed and kept in a safe place until finishing work, so that they cannot be re-inserted by other persons unnoticed. The meter should be mounted as follows on the meter board or similar device provided for this purpose (see also figure "Meter dimensions" in chapter 2.2 "Technical data"):
1. Find the correct meter position for mounting the meter.
2. Determine the desired form of fixing (open or covered meter mounting).
3. Set the meter suspension eyelet in the relevant position. This can be moved up or down over the stop as illustrated below.
4. Check with a phase tester or universal measuring instrument whether the connecting wires are live. If so, remove the corresponding consumer fuses and keep them in a safe place until installation is completed, so that they cannot be replaced by anyone unnoticed.
206
190
coveredCase edge
open
StopRaise latchslightly and push downover stop
Fig 7.2 Meter suspension eyelet
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual 7-8 Installation and commissioning
5. Mark the three fixing points (suspension triangle as in following illustration) on the mounting surface provided:
- horizontal base of suspension triangle = 150 mm
- height of suspension triangle for open mounting = 206 mm
- height of suspension triangle for covered mounting = 190 mm
150 mm
206
or 1
90 m
m r
espe
ctiv
ely
75 mm
Fig. 7.3 Drilling plan
6. Drill the three holes for the fixing screws.
7. Unscrew the meter terminal cover.
8. Fit the meter with the three fixing screws on the mounting surface provided.
H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Installation and commissioning 7-9
7.5 Connecting meter
Danger
Dangerous voltage on conductors
The connecting conductors at the point of installation must be voltage-free for installation of the meter. Contact with live components is dangerous to life. The relevant preliminary fuses should therefore be removed and kept in a safe place until finishing work, so that they cannot be re-inserted by other persons unnoticed.
Note
Connecting conductor cross-section
ZMD310CT with a maximum current of 100 or 120 A require connecting conductors of 35 mm2 cross-section. Owing to the terminal opening of 9.5 mm only cable is possible. The electrical connections to the meter should be made as follows accord-ing to the connection diagram:
1. Check with a phase tester or universal measuring instrument whether the connecting wires are live. If so, remove the corresponding consumer fuses and keep them in a safe place until installation is completed, so that they cannot be replaced by anyone unnoticed.
Connecting the phase connection lines
2. Shorten the phase connecting wires to the required length and then strip them.
3. Insert the phase connecting wires in the relevant terminals (the termi-nals are numbered as shown in the connection diagram) and tighten the terminal screws firmly (torque 3 to 5 Nm).
With small conductor cross-sections (e.g. 4 mm2) the connecting line must be placed in the indentation (stamping) of the current loops, so that it cannot shift sideways when tightening the terminal screws. Ensure that the connecting line remains in the indentation when tightening.
Current loop conductor
Indentation (stamping) for smaller connection lines
Fig 7.4 Cross-section through current loop conductor
It is recommended to identify the beginning and end of the relevant conductors with a suitable test unit (e.g. buzzer) to ensure that the right consumer is connected to the meter output.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual 7-10 Installation and commissioning
Voltage outputs
Control inputs andoutput contacts
Inputs and/oroutput contacts ofextension board
Pulseinputs
Communicationinterfaces
Communication unit
L1 L2 L3 N
Phase connections
U1 U2 U3 N
Fig 7.5 Meter connections (example ZMD300xT)
Voltage outputs
Control inputs andoutput contacts
Inputs and/oroutput contacts of extension board
L1 L2 L3 N
Phase connections
U1 U2 U3 N
Interface board
Communicationinterface
Fig 7.6 Meter connections (example ZMD300xR)
Note
Power losses at the terminals
Insufficiently tightened screws at the phase connections can lead to increased power losses at the terminals and therefore to undesirable heat-ing. A contact resistance of 1 mΩ causes a power loss of 10 W at 100 A !
Connecting the signal inputs and outputs
4. Shorten the connecting wires of the signal inputs and outputs to the required length and strip them for approx. 4 mm (wires and strands up to 2.5 mm2 can be connected).
5. If stranded wire is used, it is recommended to provide it with ferrules for connection.
H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Installation and commissioning 7-11
6. Connect the connecting wires of the signal inputs and outputs as follows to the screwless spring-loaded terminals (the terminals are numbered as shown on the connection diagram):
- Insert a size 1 screwdriver in the upper opening and insert it turn-ing slightly upwards (Fig 7.7 A).
- Now place the stripped connecting wire in the lower opening and hold it there securely (Fig 7.7 B).
- Withdraw the screwdriver. The connecting wire is then firmly fixed (Fig 7.7 C).
ca. 4 mm
A B C
Fig 7.7 Connection in screwless spring-loaded terminals
Danger
Dangerous voltage on conductors
The insulation of the connecting line must extend as far as the terminal indentation, i.e. there must be no further bare part of the connecting line visible above the terminal edge (as shown in Fig 7.7 C). Touching live parts is dangerous to life. The stripped part of the connecting wire should be shortened if necessary. If a connecting wire must be disconnected again for any reason, this is performed in the reverse sequence:
A B C
Fig 7.8 Releasing connection from spring-loaded terminal
Warning
Damage to terminals
Never withdraw connecting wires with the terminal closed, since this could damage the terminal.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual 7-12 Installation and commissioning
7.6 Check of connections
Note
Effects of connection errors
Only a properly connected meter measures correctly ! Every connection error results in a financial loss for the power company ! Before putting into operation the following points must be checked again and corrected if necessary:
1. Has the correct meter (identification number) been installed at the measuring point of the relevant consumer ?
2. Is the calibration connection closed (voltage jumper between phase and voltage circuit) (no contact pin inserted to lift the contact spring) ?
3. Are the phase connections centered in the current terminals ?
4. Are all thrust screws for the phase connections and neutral tightened sufficiently ?
5. Are all conductors of phase 1 connected correctly according to the connection diagram ?
- Output of consumer fuse → terminal 1 of meter
- Terminal 3 of meter → Consumer load
6. Are all conductors of phases 2 and 3 connected correctly according to the connection diagram (follow conductors similar to phase 1) ?
7. Are all conductors of the neutral connected correctly according to the connection diagram ?
- Neutral isolator of consumer → terminal 10 of meter
- Terminal 12 of meter → Consumer load
H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Installation and commissioning 7-13
7.7 Commissioning and functional check
Danger
Dangerous voltage on conductors
The consumer fuses must be re-inserted before commissioning and func-tional check of the meter. If the terminal cover is not screwed tight, there is a danger of contact with the connection terminals. Contact with live components is dangerous to life. The relevant consumer fuses should therefore be removed before making any modifications to the installation and these kept in a safe place until completing the work to prevent anyone re-inserting them unnoticed.
Note
Prerequisites for commissioning and functional check
If no mains voltage is present, commissioning and functional check must be performed at a later date. The installed meter should be put into service and checked as follows:
1. Insert the preliminary fuses removed for installation. The meter is switched on.
2. Check whether the operating display appears correctly (no error message).
3. Check on the display whether all three phases L1, L2 and L3 are indicated and show the right phase sequence.
- If one phase is not present, the relevant symbol is absent. This is also the case if the voltage is less than 20 V.
- With the normal phase sequence L1-L2-L3 the symbols are displayed continuously.
- If, however, the meter is connected with reversed phase sequence (e.g. L2-L1-L3) the symbols flash. The direction of field rotation (clockwise or anticlockwise) is determined by the parametrization. This has no influence, however, on the measuring behaviour of the meter.
Fig 7.9 Phase sequence indication
4. Remove all consumer fuses.
5. Insert the consumer fuse of phase 1 and check the display of the energy direction: +P to right. If the energy direction arrow P points to the left, the input and output of phase 1 are interchanged. If the meter displays no energy direction, the voltage jumper is open, the consumer fuse defective or the neutral is not connected.
6. Remove the consumer fuse of phase 1 again.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual 7-14 Installation and commissioning
7. Repeat the same test for the other phases as in points 5 and 6.
8. Further values (e.g. phase voltages) can be checked in the service list obtained via the service menu if parametrized.
9. Check the tariff displays and switch the control voltages to the tariff inputs on and off. The arrow symbols of the tariff display must change.
10. If the meter is connected to a meter readout system via the electrical interface, a check should be made of correct functioning of the data transmission.
11. If a GSM modem is connected to the meter, the SMS transmission function should be checked by sending a test SMS message, e.g. to your own mobile telephone (refer also to section 4.16.3 "Sending an SMS message").
12. Screw on the terminal cover if the meter is operating correctly. Other-wise first locate and eliminate the error.
13. Seal the terminal cover with two company seals.
14. Set the current date and time with the relevant formatted command (see 11.3) or in the set mode (see 11.4).
15. Close the front door.
16. Re-seal the front door.
H 71 0200 0041 e en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL
8 Maintenance and service
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 8-2 Preliminary edition Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 26.07.1999 First edition a 17.04.2000 Text and illustration adaptations after internal revision. Section 8.4 new. b 28.09.2000 Various corrections c 18.04.2002 ZMD310CT/400AT included d 02.05.2002 ZMD310AT included e 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Table of contents Preliminary edition 8-3
Table of contents
8 Maintenance and service ______________________________8-5 8.1 Meter check ________________________________________________ 8-5 8.2 Meter testing _______________________________________________ 8-5 8.2.1 Test mode _________________________________________________ 8-5 8.2.2 Measuring times_____________________________________________ 8-6 8.2.3 Optical test output ___________________________________________ 8-7 8.2.4 Creep test _________________________________________________ 8-7 8.2.5 Starting test active part _______________________________________ 8-8 8.2.6 Starting test reactive part _____________________________________ 8-8 8.3 Input of formatted commands _________________________________ 8-9 8.4 Changing values in set mode _________________________________ 8-10 8.5 Changing the battery________________________________________ 8-11
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 8-4 Preliminary edition Table of contents
H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Maintenance and service Preliminary edition 8-5
8 Maintenance and service This chapter describes the necessary maintenance and servicing work. This includes checking and testing of the meter, using formatted commands, etc.
8.1 Meter check The following points should be checked on the meters periodically (e.g. with every data readout):
• Is the meter dry and clean (particularly display and optical interface) ?
• Is the meter in operation and serviceable (operating display present and sensible) ?
• Are all calibration and factory seals undamaged ?
• Has the meter internal self-test performed regularly recorded any error since the previous check (check on the display or readout log).
• Have the values of the energy registers changed within reasonable limits since the last data readout (no unauthorised manipulations made to the installation) ?
• Does the symbol appear in the liquid crystal display ?
Continue as described in chapter 9 "Eror messages and measures in event of faults" if errors or irregularities are found.
8.2 Meter testing Meter tests should be performed at periodic intervals according to the valid national regulations (either on all meters or on specific random samples). In principle the meters should be dismantled for this purpose according to the instructions in section 9.3 "Disconnecting meter" and replaced by a substitute meter. The meter test can also be performed on the spot in certain circumstances.
8.2.1 Test mode
The test mode permits increasing the resolution of the energy registers by 1 to 3 digits. This allows the power supply company to carry out the so called measuring unit test in sufficiently short time.
In test mode the same registers shown as rolling display in the operating display are always displayed, but with high resolution and not rolling.
The energy registers comprise a total of 12 digits. A maximum of 8 digits, however, is shown on the display. The effective number of digits shown and the number of decimal places are determined by the parametrizing. For the test mode more decimal places are normally parametrized (maximum 4) to permit a quicker test of the transmission to the energy registers.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 8-6 Preliminary edition Maintenance and service
Register ,Display in normal mode
Display in test mode
Fig. 8.1 Display changeover normal mode – test mode
Changeover from normal to test mode and back is made by formatted commands (see chapter 8.3 "Input of formatted commands") or manually in the service menu.
In test mode the optical test output for active energy can also provide reactive energy pulses depending on the parametrizing. Reactive energy pulses are supplied to this test output if the register shown on the display represents a reactive energy register. Active energy pulses are supplied for all other measured values shown as in normal operating mode.
8.2.2 Measuring times
For technical reasons greater measuring deviations can occur during short-term measurements. It is therefore recommended to use sufficiently long measuring times in order to achieve the required accuracy.
Table of measuring times required:
ZMD400xx ZFD400xx
Measuring uncertainty 0.1 %
Measuring uncertainty 0.05 %
Un = 58 to 230 V In= 1 A, 5 A
Current [% In]
3 P cosϕ=1
1 P 1
3 P 0.5
3 P cosϕ=1
1 P 1
3 P 0.5
1 40 s 40 s 90 s 80 s 80 s 160 s
2 20 s 20 s 40 s 40 s 40 s 80 s
5 10 s 10 s 15 s 16 s 16 s 32 s
10 8 s 8 s 10 s 14 s 14 s 18 s
20 6 s 6 s 8 s 12 s 12 s 14 s
50 6 s 6 s 6 s 12 s 12 s 12 s
100 6 s 6 s 6 s 12 s 12 s 12 s
200 6 s 6 s 6 s 12 s 12 s 12 s
3 P = universal 1 P = single-phase
H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Maintenance and service Preliminary edition 8-7
ZMD300xx Measuring uncertainty 0.1 %
Un = 230 V Ib = 5 A
Current [% Ib]
3 P cosϕ=1
1 P 1
3 P 0,5
5 40 s 40 s 90 s
10 20 s 20 s 40 s
20 10 s 10 s 20 s
50 8 s 8 s 10 s
100 6 s 6 s 8 s
1000 6 s 6 s 6 s
2000 6 s 6 s 6 s
2400 6 s 6 s 6 s
3 P = universal 1 P = single-phase
8.2.3 Optical test output
The red optical test outputs on the meter above the LCD should be used for meter testing. These supply pulses at a frequency dependent on the meter constant R, whereby the rising edge is always decisive for the test.
Note that the digital signal processing provides a delay of 2 seconds between the instantaneous power at the meter and the appearance of the pulses at the optical test outputs. No pulses are lost.
The number of pulses per second for the desired power is obtained by multiplying the meter constant R by the power in kW divided by 3600.
Example: Meter constant R = 1000 Power P = 35 kW f-test output = R x P / 3600 = 1000 x 35 / 3600 = 10 imp/s
The optical test outputs are continuously lit at creep.
8.2.4 Creep test
A test voltage Up of 1.15 Un is used for the creep test (no-load test) to IEC 61036 (e.g. Up = 265 V with Un = 230 V).
Procedure:
1. Disconnect the meter from the mains for at least 10 seconds.
2. Then switch on the test voltage Up and wait approx. 10 seconds. After this time the energy direction arrows must disappear. The red optical test outputs are permanently "lit".
3. Switch on test mode (high resolution).
4. The meter must not deliver more than one pulse during the creep test. Check the energy levels for changes in test mode. They must not increase by more than the value of one pulse (see face plate).
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 8-8 Preliminary edition Maintenance and service
8.2.5 Starting test active part
Procedure:
1. Apply a load current of 0.02 % of the nominal current In (e.g. 1 mA with In = 5 A) and the voltage Un (three-phase in each case) and cosϕ = 1. The meter must remain in creep.
2. Increase the load current to 0.1 % In for the ZxD405xx or 0.2 % In for the ZxD410xx (i.e. 10 mA with In = 5 A). The energy direction arrow "P" must appear within 10 seconds. The optical test output for active energy consumption is no longer permanently "lit".
Procedure:
1. Apply a load current of 0.1 % of the basic current Ib (e.g. 5 mA with Ib = 5 A) and the voltage Un (three-phase in each case) and cosϕ = 1. The meter must remain in creep.
2. Increase the load current to 0.4 % Ib (i.e. 20 mA with Ib = 5 A). The energy direction arrow "P" must appear within 10 seconds. The optical test output for active energy consumption is no longer permanently "lit".
8.2.6 Starting test reactive part
Procedure:
1. Apply a load current of 0.02 % of the nominal current In (e.g. 1 mA with In = 5 A) and the voltage Un (three-phase in each case) and sinϕ = 1. The meter must remain in creep.
2. Increase the load current to 0.2 % In (i.e. 10 mA with In = 5 A). The energy direction arrow "Q" must appear within 10 seconds. The optical test output for reactive energy consumption is no longer permanently "lit".
Procedure:
1. Apply a load current of 0.1 % of the basic current Ib (e.g. 5 mA with Ib = 5 A) and the voltage Un (three-phase in each case) and sinϕ = 1. The meter must remain in creep.
2. Increase the load current to 0.4 % Ib (i.e. 20 mA with Ib = 5 A). The energy direction arrow "Q" must appear within 10 seconds. The optical test output for active energy consumption is no longer permanently "lit".
ZxD400xx
ZMD300xx
ZxD400Cx
ZMD300Cx
H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Maintenance and service Preliminary edition 8-9
8.3 Input of formatted commands The following operating data or meter characteristics can be modified by the input of formatted commands. The user of formatted commands, however, must have the necessary access authorization according to the security system.
The following commands can be used both according to IEC 62056-21 and also with DLMS:
• Set time / date
• Set identification numbers for the power supply company and for the manufacturer (by line).
• Initiation of reset via interface
• Neutralize reset inputs KA/KB
• Set / reset reset counter
• Set / reset energy registers
• Set / reset total energy registers
• Set / reset demand maximum registers
• Set / reset power factor registers
• Reset stored values
• Reset battery hours counter
• Reset voltage failures registers
• Switch on / off increased resolution (test mode) of energy registers
• Delete error messages
• Change passwords P1,P2 and W5
• Reset load profile
• Reset event profile
The following commands can only be executed with DLMS:
• Reset event register
- Under- and overvoltages
- Demand messages
- Current messages
- Power factor messages
• Set thresholds for messages
Formatted commands are transferred to the meter with a suitable aid (hand held terminal or laptop) via the optical interface or via an interface circuit of the communication unit.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 8-10 Preliminary edition Maintenance and service
Procedure:
1. Start the hand held terminal or laptop (according to the details in the associated operating instructions).
2. Connect the cable of the reading head to the handheld terminal or laptop.
3. Place the reading head in the "Readout" indentation on the plastic viewing window of the meter. The reading head cable must point towards the terminal cover (when mounted vertically down). The reading head is held magnetically.
4. Input the required formatted commands to the meter (according to the details in the operating instructions for the communication software used with the hand held terminal or laptop).
5. Check that the desired effect takes place, e.g. that the modified identification number has been correctly stored in the meter (display or readout log) or if the test mode has been switched on (arrow symbol on display).
6. Remove the reading head from the meter again after transmission.
8.4 Changing values in set mode In set mode some values (date and time, identification numbers and battery hours counter) can be changed with the aid of the reset button and display buttons, without the use of auxiliary aids such as hand-held terminal or laptop.
Procedure:
1. Remove the front door seal.
2. Open the front door, so that the reset button is accessible.
3. Press the "up" or "down" display button briefly. The display changes from operating display to display check.
4. Press the reset button. The display changes to the service menu with the first menu item.
5. Press the "down" display button as many times briefly, until the menu item "Set mode" (SEt) is displayed.
6. Press the "up" or "down" display button for longer (at least 2 seconds), until the first value for setting is displayed.
7. Select the value to be changed with the "up" or "down" display button.
8. Press the reset button. The first digit of the value to be changed flashes.
9. Change the digit by pressing the "up" (increase) or "down" (decrease) display button as required.
10. Press the reset button. The next digit of the value to be changed flashes, if it was not previously the last digit. Otherwise all digits flash together.
H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Maintenance and service Preliminary edition 8-11
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 for all digits of the value to be changed, until all digits of the changed value flash together.
12. Press the reset button to confirm the new value (the value set can be rejected and the previous value retained by pressing the "up" or "down" display button). After pressing the reset button the new value is given a plausibility test and stored if the test result is positive. The next value for setting is displayed. In the event of an error (e.g. invalid date or time) all digits continue flashing and the input must be repeated.
13. If required, further values can be changed as described in steps 7 to 12.
14. If you press the "up" and "down" display buttons simultaneously, the operating display appears again.
15. Close the front door.
16. Re-seal the front door.
8.5 Changing the battery If the meter is provided with a battery, this must be changed if one of the following events occurs:
• The symbol appears in the liquid crystal display.
• The battery has been in the meter for more than 10 years (preventive servicing). It is recommended to note the date of insertion on the battery. The 10 years depend on the product and on the age of the battery when inserting it into the meter.
• The battery operating hours counter indicates over 80,000 hours (can be read under code C.6.0 in service mode).
• The battery charge indicates less than 4.8 V (can be read under code C.6.1 in service mode).
Note
Meters with or without battery
Only meters parametrized as "fitted with battery" have the symbol and the battery operating hours counter.
Danger
Dangerous voltage on contacts in the battery compartment
The contacts in the battery compartment may have mains voltage applied (F circuit). Therefore only remove the battery with the existing battery holder and insert the new battery only with the battery holder. Ensure that the contacts are never touched.
Note
Replacement battery
Only use a lithium battery with a rated voltage of 6 V and the same construction as the original battery as a replacement.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 8-12 Preliminary edition Maintenance and service
Procedure:
1. Remove the front door seal.
2. Open the front door. The battery compartment is on the left below the liquid crystal display.
Fig. 8.2 Battery compartment
3. Press on the latch of the plastic battery holder until it releases and then withdraw the battery holder with the old battery.
Fig. 8.3 Removing the battery
4. Mark the current date on the new battery.
5. Draw the old battery from the holder and insert the new battery.
H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+Gyr Maintenance and service Preliminary edition 8-13
Fig. 8.4 Battery holder and battery
6. Push the battery holder with battery in the battery compartment until the latch engages.
7. Reset the battery hours counter to zero with the relevant formatted command (see 8.3) or in the set mode (see 8.4).
8. Close the front door.
9. Re-seal the front door.
10. Dispose of old battery as hazardous waste in accordance with local regulations.
Note
Checking time-of-day and date
After inserting the battery, check the time-of-day and date without power applied and set these values again if necessary.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 8-14 Preliminary edition Maintenance and service
H 71 0200 0042 e en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL
9 Error messages and measures in event of faults
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 9-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 26.07.1999 First edition a 17.04.2000 Text and illustration adaptations after internal revision a 06.04.2000 Index field display changed b 29.09.2000 Changes on pages 5, 8, 10 and 12 c 28.02.2002 New error message: check-sum stored values / event log d 02.05.2002 ZMD310AT included e 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrTable of contents 9-3
Table of contents
9 Error messages and measures in event of faults ___________ 9-5 9.1 Error messages _____________________________________________ 9-5 9.1.1 Structure of an error message__________________________________ 9-5 9.1.2 Error groups ________________________________________________ 9-6 9.2 Operating faults ____________________________________________ 9-10 9.3 Disconnecting meters________________________________________ 9-11 9.3.1 Removing meters with transformer connection (ZxD400xx) _________ 9-11 9.3.2 Removing meter with direct connection (ZMD300xx)_______________ 9-13 9.4 Repairing meters ___________________________________________ 9-14
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 9-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrError messages and measures in event of faults 9-5
9 Error messages and measures in event of faults
This chapter explains the significance of error messages and indicates action to be taken in the event of their appearance and for functional disturbances. The removal of the meter and its repair are also described.
9.1 Error messages The meters regularly perform an internal self-test. This checks the correct function of all important parts.
In the event of a serious error detected, the meters display an error code. This error code appears as an eight-digit figure together with "F.F" or "FF" in the display, depending on the parametrization and significance of the error. The error code is always included in the readout log (error code F.F(00000000) = no error).
If nothing else is specified in the following description of the error groups, the error messages can only be deleted with formatted commands (see 8.3 "Input of formatted commands"). If the error occurs again, the meter should be removed and sent to the responsible service and repair center (according to 9.4 "Repairing meters").
9.1.1 Structure of an error message
An error message has the following form:
Fig. 9.1 Error message from meters of the ZxD series
Meters of the ZxD series all use the same format for error messages. This consists of four groups of 2 digits each, whereby the groups have the following significance:
F.F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Time-baseerror (clock)
Error forwrite/read
access
Check-sumerror
Othererrors
Structure
Error messagesof ZxD meters
Fig. 9.2 Significance of error message
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 9-6 Error messages and measures in event of faults
Each group has two digits written in hexadecimal notation and can there-fore have the values 0 to 9 and letters A to F. Both digits each form the sum of the individual values of 4 possible types of error as shown in the following diagrams.
9.1.2 Error groups
Group 1 of error message of ZxD meters
1248 128Insufficient battery voltageInvalid time / invalid date*
* not used
*
****
Value in hexadecimal code
Sum of values
4
Fig 9.3 Group 1 of error message
The first digit in the first group has no significance, since no error messages are assigned to it.
The second digit can have values between 0 (no error message) and 3 (both error messages set). Significance:
Insufficient battery voltage
Battery missing or discharged. The calendar clock will stop when the Supercap is discharged following separation from the mains.
The error is deleted automatically when the battery voltage has again reached a sufficient value (e.g. after inserting a new battery as described in 8.5 "Changing the battery").
This error message only appears if the meter is parametrized as "fitted with battery". Otherwise there is no check of the battery condition.
Invalid time / invalid date
The meter has found that the calendar clock has stopped at some time. The clock is running, but shows the wrong time or date.
The error is deleted automatically when the time and date have been set correctly by the relevant formatted command or manually in the set mode (see 8.3 "Input of formatted commands" or 8.4 "Changing values in set mode").
Time-base errors (clock)
F.F 01 00 00 00
F.F 02 00 00 00
H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrError messages and measures in event of faults 9-7
Group 2 of error message of ZxD meters
1248 1248Main memory RAMBackup/parameter memory Measuring system
Value in hexadecimal code
Sum of values
Time base
Load profile memory Ripple control receiver (extension board)Communication unit (ZxDxxxAT/CT)Display card
Fig. 9.4 Group 2 of error message
In the second group both digits can have values between 0 (no error message) and F (all four error messages set). Significance:
Error in RAM main memory
This appears in the display as a so-called Fatal Error when starting the meter if the RAM test fails.
The meter does not operate and must be changed.
The same applies to messages: F.F .. x3 / x5 / x7 / x9 / xB / xD / xF
Error in backup/parameter memory
The meter supplies this message in the event of a repeated memory test failure. The meter can contain faulty data or fail.
Error in the measuring system
The meter supplies this message for repeated failure of the measuring system test. The meter can contain faulty data or fail.
Error in time base
The meter sets this message for repeated failure of the time base test. The calendar clock can display an invalid time or date.
Error in load profile memory (EEPROM)
The meter sets this message for repeated failure of a memory test. The meter can contain incorrect data.
Error in the ripple control receiver (extension board)
The meter sets this message for repeated failure of a test of the ripple control receiver on the extension board. The meter uses the default con-figuration.
Error in the communication unit (ZxDxxxAT/CT only)
The meter sets this message for repeated failure of a test of the communi-cation unit. Communication fails.
Error in the display card
The meter sets this message for repeated failure of a display card test. The liquid crystal display shows incorrect data.
Errors for write/read access
F.F 00 x1 00 00
F.F 00 x2 00 00
F.F 00 x4 00 00
F.F 00 x8 00 00
F.F 00 1x 00 00
F.F 00 2x 00 00
F.F 00 4x 00 00
F.F 00 8x 00 00
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 9-8 Error messages and measures in event of faults
Group 3 of error messageof ZxD meters
1248 1248ROM check-sumBackup data memory check-sum
* not used
Check-sum stored values / event log***
Value in hexadecimal code
Sum of values
Parameter memory check-sumLoad profile check-sum
Fig. 9.5 Group 3 of error message
The first digit in the third group can have the value 0 (no error message) or 1 (error message set).
The second digit can have values between 0 (no error message) and F (all four error messages set). Significance:
Check-sum error in ROM of microprocessor
This appears in the display as a so-called Fatal Error when the relevant ROM test fails.
Check-sum error in memory for backup data
This also appears on the display as so-called Fatal Error if the relevant memory test fails.
Check-sum error in memory for parameters
This also appears on the display as so-called Fatal Error if the relevant EEPROM test fails.
In all 3 cases mentioned the meter does not operate and should be changed.
The same applies to messages F.F .. .. 03 / 05 / 06 / 07 / 09 / 0A up to 0F.
Check-sum error in memory of load profile
The meter sets this message for repeated failure of a load profile test. The meter can contain incorrect data.
Check-sum test for the stored values or event log
The meter sets this message for repeated failure of a check-sum test for the stored values or event log. The meter can contain incorrect data.
Check-sum errors
F.F 00 00 01 00
F.F 00 00 02 00
F.F 00 00 04 00
F.F 00 00 08 00
F.F 00 00 1x 00
H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrError messages and measures in event of faults 9-9
Gruppe 4 of error messageof ZxD meters
124 1248
Overflow in measuring system
System error (e.g. watch dog)
Value in hexadecimal code
Sum of values
Setting mode not concluded
Startup failed
Extension board identification not valid
8
* not used*
*
*
Fig. 9.6 Group 4 of error message
The first digit in the fourth group can have the values 0 to 3 and 8 to B.
The second digit can have values between 0 (no error message) and F (all four error messages set). Significance:
Invalid startup owing to incorrect data storage
The meter has detected that the last data storage was not performed correctly. The meter can contain incorrect data.
Overflow or no activity of measuring system
The meter has detected an error in the data processing. It may not have measured part of the energy.
Setting mode not concluded
A setting command has not been concluded correctly. The meter can con-tain incorrect data.
The error is deleted automatically when the next similar setting command is correctly concluded.
System error in microprocessor
The meter loses all data determined since the last storage, i.e. for 24 hours maximum.
Identification of extension board differs from that parametrized in the meter.
The meter possibly does not have functions required such as data profile, control inputs or output signals.
Other errors
F.F 00 00 00 x1
F.F 00 00 00 x2
F.F 00 00 00 x8
F.F 00 00 00 1x
F.F 00 00 00 8x
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 9-10 Error messages and measures in event of faults
9.2 Operating faults If the liquid crystal display is illegible or the data readout does not function, the following points should first be checked:
1. Is the mains voltage present (pre-fuses intact and test terminals closed)?.
2. Is the maximum permissible ambient temperature not exceeded ?
3. Is the plastic viewing window over the face plate clean (not scratched, painted over, misted over or soiled in any way) ?
Warning
Danger of short-circuits
Never clean soiled meters under running water or with high pressure devices. Penetrating water can cause short-circuits. A damp cleaning cloth is sufficient to remove normal dirt such as dust. If the meter is more heavily soiled, it should be dismantled if necessary and sent to the responsible service and repair centre, so that a new plastic viewing window can be fitted. If none of the points listed is the cause of the fault, the meter should be disconnected, removed and sent to the responsible service and repair centre (according to section 9.4 "Repairing meters").
H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrError messages and measures in event of faults 9-11
9.3 Disconnecting meters
9.3.1 Removing meters with transformer connection (ZxD400xx)
Danger
Dangerous voltage on conductors
The connecting conductors must be free from voltage when the meter is removed. It is dangerous to life to touch live parts. Remove the corre-sponding pre-fuses and ensure that they cannot be re-inserted by anyone unnoticed before completing the work.
If the meter is connected via voltage transformers, it must be possible to open the test terminal (e.g. TVS14). For this purpose release the screw of the relevant jumper with an insulated screwdriver, push the jumper away from the terminal and then re-tighten the screw.
If there is no test terminal block, the primary voltage must be interrupted, i.e. the system switched off.
Danger
Dangerous voltage on current transformers
The secondary sides of the current transformer circuits must not be opened if a current is flowing in the primary. This would produce an extremely high voltage of several thousand volts dangerous to life at the terminals and the insulation would be destroyed.
Short-circuit the current transformer at the test terminal block (e.g. TVS14) to remove the meter. For this purpose release the screw of the relevant short-circuit jumper with an insulated screwdriver, push the short-circuit jumper over the terminals on the current transformer side and then re-tighten the screw. The circuit on the meter side can then be opened without danger.
If there is no test terminal block, the primary voltage must be interrupted, i.e. the system switched off. The meter should be removed as follows:
1. Short-circuit the current transformer with the short-circuit jumpers in the test terminal block using an insulated screwdriver and interrupt the voltage connections with the jumpers in the test terminal block.
2. Remove the two factory seals at the screws of the terminal cover.
3. Release the two screws of the terminal cover and remove it.
4. Check that the connecting wires are not live using a phase tester or universal measuring instrument. If not, check the condition of the test terminals again according to Fig 9.7. Remove the relevant pre-fuses if necessary and ensure that they cannot be re-inserted by anyone unnoticed before completing the installation.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 9-12 Error messages and measures in event of faults
k l
L1
L2
L3N
K Lk l
K Lk l
K L
1 2 3 4 6 7 9 115 8
Loads
Short-circuit jumpersclosed
Voltage jumpers openPre-fuses and neutralconductor isolatorremoved
Fig 9.7 Condition of test terminal block before removing meter
5. Remove the connecting wires of the signal inputs and outputs from the screwless spring-loaded terminals as follows:
- Place a size 1 screwdriver in the upper opening and insert it turning slightly upwards (Fig. 9.8A).
- Then draw the wire from the lower opening (Fig. 9.8B).
- Withdraw the screwdriver (Fig. 9.8C).
A B C
Fig. 9.8 Removing connections in screwless spring-loaded terminals
Warning
Damage to terminals
Never withdraw connecting wires from closed terminals. The terminals could be damaged.
6. Release the terminal screws 1 to 11 of the phase connecting wires with a suitable screwdriver and withdraw the phase connecting wires from the terminals.
7. Fit a substitute meter as described in section 7.5 "Connecting meter" and the following chapters.
H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrError messages and measures in event of faults 9-13
9.3.2 Removing meter with direct connection (ZMD300xx)
Danger
Dangerous voltage on conductors
The connecting wires at the place of installation must not be live when removing the meter. Touching of live parts is dangerous to life. Remove the corresponding customer fuses and keep these in a safe place until work is completed, so that they cannot be replaced by anyone unnoticed.
The meter should be removed as follows:
1. Remove the two factory seals at the screws of the terminal cover.
2. Release the two screws of the terminal cover and remove it.
3. Check that the connecting wires are not live using a phase tester or universal measuring instrument. If they are live, remove the corresponding customer fuses and keep these in a safe place until work is completed, so that they cannot be replaced by anyone unnoticed.
4. Remove the connecting wires of the signal inputs and outputs from the screwless spring-loaded terminals as follows:
- Place a size 1 screwdriver in the upper opening and insert it turning slightly upwards (Fig. 9.9A).
- Then draw the wire from the lower opening (Fig. 9.9B).
- Withdraw the screwdriver (Fig. 9.9C).
A B C
Fig. 9.9 Removing connections in screwless spring-loaded terminals
Warning
Damage to terminals
Never withdraw connecting wires from closed terminals. The terminals could be damaged.
5. Release the terminal screws 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10 and 12 of the phase
connecting wires with a suitable screwdriver and withdraw the phase connecting wires from the terminals.
6. Fit a substitute meter as described in section 7.5 "Connecting meter" and the following chapters.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 9-14 Error messages and measures in event of faults
9.4 Repairing meters Meters must only be repaired by the responsible service and repair centre (or manufacturer).
The following procedure should be adopted if a meter repair is necessary:
1. If installed, remove the meter as described in section 9.3 and fit a substitute meter.
2. Describe the error found as exactly as possible and state the name and telephone number of the person responsible in case of inquiries.
3. Pack the meter to ensure it can suffer no further damage during transport. Preferably use the original packing if available. Do not enclose any loose components.
4. Send the meter to the responsible service and repair centre.
H 71 0200 0043a en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL
10 Decommissioning, disposal
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0043a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 10-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 26.07.1999 First edition – 17.04.2000 Front page and revision history added a 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0043a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrTable of contents 10-3
Table of contents
10 Decommissioning, disposal __________________________ 10-5 10.1 Decommissioning ___________________________________________ 10-5 10.2 Disposal __________________________________________________ 10-5
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0043a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 10-4 Table of contents
H 71 0200 0043a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Landis+GyrDecommissioning, disposal 10-5
10 Decommissioning, disposal This chapter explains the disconnection of the meter from the system and its correct disposal.
10.1 Decommissioning The procedure for disconnecting and removing the meter from the mains is described in Chapter 9.3.
10.2 Disposal Based on the data specified in environmental certificate ISO 14001, the components used in meters are largely separable and can therefore be taken to the relevant disposal or recycling point.
Note
Disposal and environmental protection regulations
For the disposal of meters observe the local disposal and environmental protection regulations in effect without fail.
Components Disposal
Printed circuit boards Electronic waste: disposal according to local regulations.
Battery Hazardous waste: disposal according to local regulations.
LEDs, LCD-Display Hazardous waste: disposal according to local regulations.
Metal parts Sorted and taken to collective materials disposal point.
Plastic components Sorted and taken to recycling (regranulation) plant or if no other possibility to refuse incineration.
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0043a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual 10-6 Decommissioning, disposal
H 71 0200 0141 c en
E lectr ic i ty Meters IEC
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr D ia log
ZMD300 AT / CT USER MANUAL
11 Index
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 11-2 Revision history
Revision history Index Date Comments − 28.02.2002 First edition a 19.04.2002 Update according to document changes b 31.03.2003 New layout according to CI and update according to document changes c 30.06.2003 Update according to document changes for software version B21
Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com
H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+Gyr Index 11-3
11 Index This chapter contains an overall index of the user manual ZMD300xT.
Absolute accuracy __________________________________________ 2-12 Accuracy class _____________________________________________ 2-12 Accuracy of calendar clock ___________________________________ 2-13 Activation of control signals__________________________________ 4.7-8 Active component of power__________________________________ 4.2-8 Active power ___________________________________4.2-5, 4.2-8, 4.2-9 Active power direction arrow___________________________________ 5-7 Adaptation of energy portions________________________________ 4.9-7 Additional control inputs ______________________________ 4.1-11, 4.1-9 Additional meter functions_____________________________________ 2-6 Additional output contacts_____________________________ 4.1-11, 4.1-9 Advance ___________________________________________ 4.8-9, 4.8-10 Allocation of the data and parameter groups ___________________ 4.15-9 Analogue-digital converter___________________________________ 4.2-8 Aperiodic memory ________________________________________ 4.13-5 Apparent power __________________________________________ 4.2-10 Application possibilities for event signals ______________________ 4.14-7 Aron circuit____________________________________________4.2-6, 7-6 Arrow symbols ______________________________________________ 5-8 Arrows for status indication___________________________________ 3-10 Asynchronous integrating period_____________________________ 4.9-16 AT instructions for controlling GSM modems __________________ 4.16-10 Audio frequency filter ______________________________________ 4.6-7 Automatic data readout_______________________________________ 6-9 Background lighting of LCD display______________________________ 5-7 Basic current ______________________________________________ 2-11 Basic information for connecting meter __________________________ 7-6 Basic layout of LCD display ____________________________________ 5-7 Basic versions of energy recording _______________________ 4.8-5, 4.9-5 Battery __________________________________________________ 4.4-6 Battery charge condition ______________________________________ 5-8 Battery charge status________________________________________ 8-11 Battery compartment____________________________________ 3-6, 8-12 Battery disposal ____________________________________________ 8-13 Battery exchange___________________________________________ 8-11 Battery holder _____________________________________________ 8-12 Battery operating hours counter _______________________________ 8-11 Battery operating time_____________________________________ 4.11-5 Baud rate optical interface ___________________________________ 2-14 Behaviour of ripple control receiver with mains failure____________ 4.6-11 Billing data _________________________________________ 4.1-11, 4.1-9 Billing period ______________________________________ 4.8-10, 4.9-13 Block schematic diagram _______________________________ 4.1-7, 4.1-5 Block schematic diagram of measuring unit _____________________ 4.2-5 Block schematic diagram of ripple control receiver _______________ 4.6-6 Buttons_____________________________________________ 4.1-9, 4.1-7 Calculation of apparent power_______________________________ 4.2-10 Calculation of energy consumption ____________________________ 4.8-9 Calendar clock ________________________________________2-13, 4.4-5 Calendar days ____________________________________________ 4.4-5
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 11-4 Index
Calibration________________________________________________ 4.2-8 Calibration seal __________________________________________2-6, 3-5 Calibration stage___________________________________________ 4.2-8 Case of meter ___________________________________________2-6, 3-5 Changeover date __________________________________________ 4.5-7 Changeover to a new switching program _______________________ 4.5-7 Changing the battery ________________________________________8-11 Changing the date and time__________________________________ 4.4-6 Changing values in set mode __________________________________8-10 Characteristics of meters ______________________________________2-9 Check of connections ________________________________________7-12 Check sum errors ____________________________________________9-8 Checking meter______________________________________________8-5 Clock frequency ___________________________________________ 4.2-8 Clock time________________________________________________ 4.8-7 Combimeter ________________________________________________2-6 Commissioning _________________________________________7-5, 7-13 Communication interface _________________________ 4.1-12, 4.1-10, 6-5 Communication unit _____________________________ 4.1-12, 4.1-10, 8-9 Company seal _______________________________________ 2-6, 3-5, 7-5 Compensation of natural errors _______________________________ 4.2-8 Condition of test terminal block before removing meter_____________9-12 Conditions for installation and commissioning______________________7-5 Conditions for the use of this user manual _______________________0-10 Connecting conductor_________________________________________7-7 Connecting meter ____________________________________________7-9 Connecting phase connection lines ______________________________7-9 Connecting signal inputs and outputs ___________________________7-10 Connection diagram control inputs /output contacts________________2-19 Connection diagram extension board ___________________________2-20 Connection diagram extension board with ripple control receiver ___ 4.6-11 Connection diagram three-wire networks ________________________2-19 Connection in spring-loaded terminals___________________________7-11 Connections ___________________________________________2-17, 3-8 Construction of meters________________________________________3-5 Control elements ____________________________________________5-5 Control inputs ___________________________________ 2-13, 4.1-9, 4.1-7 Control of display via optical interface____________________________5-5 Control signal statuses ______________________________________ 4.7-7 Control table ______________________________________________ 4.7-6 Control voltage _____________________________________________2-13 Controlling registers ________________________________________ 4.7-8 Controlling the integrating period ____________________________ 4.9-14 Creep test __________________________________________________8-7 CS interface ___________________________________ 4.1-12, 4.1-10, 6-8 Cumulated demand maximum _______________________________ 4.9-13 Cumulated status __________________________________________ 4.8-9 Current monitoring ________________________________________ 4.14-8 Current values _____________________________________________2-11 Data preparation for billing ____________________________4.1-11, 4.1-9 Data readout via optical interface _______________________________6-9 Date change ______________________________________________ 4.4-6 Day tables________________________________________________ 4.5-5 Decommissioning ___________________________________________10-5 Deleting load profile ______________________________________ 4.13-12 Demand inhibition ________________________________________ 4.9-18
H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+Gyr Index 11-5
Demand monitoring_______________________________________ 4.14-8 Demand recording _________________________________________ 4.9-5 Demand registers_________________________________________ 4.9-13 Demand values for tariff control _____________________________ 4.9-13 Determination of telephone number and SMS message__________ 4.16-11 Determination of the valid day table___________________________ 4.5-6 Device Language Message Specification (DLMS) __________________ 6-12 Digit size of LCD display _____________________________________ 2-13 Digital instantaneous values _________________________________ 4.2-8 Dimensions of meter ________________________________________ 2-16 Direct connection____________________________________________ 2-6 Direction arrows_____________________________________________ 5-7 Direction of rotating field___________________________________ 4.2-12 Disconnecting meter ________________________________________ 9-11 Display ____ 2-13, 3-10, 4.4-10, 4.6-12, 4.8-11, 4.9-19, 4.10-9, 4.12-6, 5-7 Display buttons _________________________________________ 3-5, 5-5 Display check ______________________________________________ 5-11 Display examples calendar clock _____________________________ 4.4-10 Display examples demand recording__________________________ 4.9-20 Display examples display list __________________________________ 5-12 Display examples energy recording___________________________ 4.8-11 Display examples operating time registers _____________________ 4.11-5 Display examples power factor ______________________________ 4.10-9 Display examples resetting _________________________________ 4.12-6 Display examples ripple control receiver_______________________ 4.6-12 Display list ____________________________________________ 5-5, 5-11 Display menu ______________________________________________ 5-12 Display of events _________________________________________ 4.13-6 Display of load profile _____________________________________ 4.13-9 Display range changeover _____________________________________ 8-6 Display window __________________________________________ 4.8-11 Disposal __________________________________________________ 10-5 Disposal regulations_________________________________________ 10-5 Disturbances _______________________________________________ 9-5 Division of memory area available __________________________ 4.13-13 DLMS (Device Language Message Specification) __________________ 6-12 DLMS items _______________________________________________ 6-12 DLMS specification__________________________________________ 6-12 Dummy communication unit ___________________________________ 3-6 Effect of hysteresis _______________________________________ 4.14-6 Electromagnetic compatibility _________________________________ 2-15 EN 61037 ________________________________________________ 4.6-5 Energy advance during the billing period _______________________ 4.8-9 Energy advance during the recording period ___________________ 4.8-10 Energy consumption recording _________________________________ 6-9 Energy proportions ___________________________________ 4.8-7, 4.9-7 Energy recording _____________________________________ 4.8-5, 4.8-9 Energy status_____________________________________________ 4.8-9 Environmental protection regulations ___________________________ 10-5 Error code _________________________________________________ 9-5 Error for write/read access ____________________________________ 9-7 Error groups________________________________________________ 9-6 Error in backup/parameter memory _____________________________ 9-7 Error in communication unit (ZxDxxxAT/CT only) __________________ 9-7 Error in display card__________________________________________ 9-7 Error in load profile memory ___________________________________ 9-7
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 11-6 Index
Error in main memory ________________________________________9-7 Error in measuring system _____________________________________9-7 Error in ripple control receiver __________________________________9-7 Error in time base____________________________________________9-7 Error incorrect data storage ____________________________________9-9 Error indication _____________________________________________5-10 Error invalid startup __________________________________________9-9 Error message _________________________________________5-10, 9-5 Event display ____________________________________________ 4.13-6 Event log___________________________________________ 4.13-5, 5-15 Event readout ____________________________________________ 4.13-8 Event types______________________________________________ 4.13-5 Exception days table________________________________________ 4.5-7 Extension board _____________________________________4.1-11, 4.1-9 Extension board identification error______________________________9-9 External control of demand inhibition _________________________ 4.9-18 External control of integrating period _________________________ 4.9-14 External dimensions of meter__________________________________2-16 External influences __________________________________________2-15 External pulse transmitter ____________________________4.1-12, 4.1-10 Face plate _________________________________________________3-10 Faults _____________________________________________________9-5 Field of application of meters___________________________________2-6 Form of fixing _______________________________________________7-7 Formation of billing periods _________________________________ 4.12-5 Formation of control signals__________________________________ 4.7-6 Formation of energy proportions ______________________________ 4.8-7 Formation of mean value during resetting period ________________ 4.10-8 Formation of mean value of demand___________________________ 4.9-9 Formation of mean values ___________________________________ 4.2-8 Formation of measured quantities _____________________________ 4.2-9 Formation of power factor mean value during integrating period ___ 4.10-6 Formation of power factor minimum __________________________ 4.10-7 Formation of the maximum demand __________________________ 4.9-12 Formatted commands_________________________________________8-9 Four-quadrant measurement ________________________________ 4.2-10 Freeze function___________________________________________ 4.9-11 Frequency range____________________________________________2-12 Frequency values ___________________________________________2-12 Front door__________________________________________________2-6 Function overview ____________________________________4.1-7, 4.1-5 Functional check____________________________________________7-13 Functional principle of ripple control systems ____________________ 4.6-5 General view of meter ________________________________________2-5 Hand held terminal _______________________________________6-9, 8-9 Hazardous waste ___________________________________________10-5 Hysteresis _______________________________________________ 4.14-6 Identification of stored values _______________________________ 4.12-6 IEC 62056-21 ______________________________________ 6-6, 6-10, 8-9 Impulse inputs __________________________ 4.1-9, 4.1-12, 4.1-7, 4.1-10 Impulse voltage strength _____________________________________2-16 Index field__________________________________________________5-8 Index system _______________________________________________5-9 Indication possibilities of LCD display ____________________________5-7 Inhibition of demand measurement___________________________ 4.9-18 Input circuit ______________________________________________ 4.2-7
H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+Gyr Index 11-7
Input mB _________________________________________ 4.9-14, 4.9-18 Input of formatted commands _________________________________ 8-9 Input signals _____________________________________________ 4.2-5 Inputs____________________________________ 2-13, 4.1-9, 4.1-7, 4.3-5 Installation _________________________________________________ 7-5 Instantaneous values_________________________________ 4.2-8, 4.10-5 Insufficient battery voltage ____________________________________ 9-6 Insulation strength__________________________________________ 2-15 Integrating period __________________________________ 4.9-11, 4.9-14 Interface board ____________________________________ 4.1-12, 4.1-10 Interfaces____________________________________ 2-14, 4.1-12, 4.1-10 Internal control of demand inhibition _________________________ 4.9-19 Internal current transformer _________________________________ 4.2-7 Interval determination_____________________________________ 4.9-11 Interval period ___________________________________________ 4.9-11 Invalid time/date ____________________________________________ 9-6 Laptop ________________________________________________ 6-9, 8-9 LCD display ______________________________________ 2-13, 3-10, 5-7 Leap years _______________________________________________ 4.4-5 Liquid crystal display _______________________________ 2-13, 3-10, 5-7 Lithium battery_____________________________________________ 8-11 Load profile __________________________________ 4.9-11, 4.13-8, 5-14 Loading capacity ___________________________________________ 2-11 Log example_______________________________________________ 6-10 Lower part of meter case _____________________________________ 2-6 Main characteristics of meters__________________________________ 2-9 Main face plate ____________________________________________ 3-10 Mains frequency_____________________________________ 4.2-8, 4.2-11 Maintenance________________________________________________ 8-5 Manufacturer seal _______________________________________ 2-6, 3-5 Material for installation of meters _______________________________ 7-5 Maximum current___________________________________________ 2-11 Maximum demand ________________________________________ 4.9-12 M-Bus interface _____________________________________________ 6-8 Mean value formation ______________________________________ 4.2-8 Mean value of demand _____________________________________ 4.9-9 Mean value of power factor during the integrating period _________ 4.10-5 Mean value of power factor during the resetting period __________ 4.10-6 Measured quantities________________________________________ 4.2-6 Measured quantity indication__________________________________ 3-11 Measured values ____________________________________ 4.1-10, 4.1-8 Measures in event of faults ____________________________________ 9-5 Measuring accuracy _________________________________________ 2-12 Measuring deviations _________________________________________ 8-6 Measuring range ___________________________________________ 2-11 Measuring system ____________________________________ 4.1-9, 4.1-7 Measuring times_____________________________________________ 8-6 Measuring uncertainty ____________________________________ 8-6, 8-7 Measuring unit ____________________________________________ 4.2-5 Memory ___________________________________________ 4.1-11, 4.1-9 Memory area division_____________________________________ 4.13-13 Memory depth ___________________________________ 4.13-14, 4.13-15 Memory management ____________________________________ 4.13-13 Meter behaviour with time deviations __________________________ 4.4-8 Meter board ________________________________________________ 7-7 Meter case _____________________________________________ 2-6, 3-5
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 11-8 Index
Meter check ________________________________________________8-5 Meter connection ____________________________________________7-9 Meter connections ___________________________________________3-8 Meter constant _________________________________________2-13, 8-7 Meter construction ___________________________________________3-5 Meter dimensions ___________________________________________2-17 Meter mounting _____________________________________________7-7 Meter testing __________________________________________5-16, 8-5 Minimum formation power factor_____________________________ 4.10-7 Modem ___________________________________________4.1-12, 4.1-10 Modifying operating data or meter characteristics __________________8-9 Monitored values _________________________________________ 4.14-5 Monitoring functions_______________________________________ 4.14-5 Monitoring of currents _____________________________________ 4.14-8 Monitoring of demand _____________________________________ 4.14-8 Monitoring of power factor__________________________________ 4.14-9 Monitoring of voltage ______________________________________ 4.14-7 Monitoring principle _______________________________________ 4.14-5 Monthly resetting _________________________________________ 4.12-6 Mounting the meter __________________________________________7-7 Movement accuracy of calendar clock ___________________________2-13 Neutral ____________________________________________________7-6 Neutral current ______________________________________4.2-5, 4.2-11 New start of integrating period ______________________________ 4.9-16 No activity of measuring system ________________________________9-9 No-load test ________________________________________________8-7 Normal mode _______________________________________________8-5 Numbering of quadrants ___________________________________ 4.2-10 OBIS index system ___________________________________________5-9 Object Identification System OBIS_______________________________5-9 Objective of DLMS __________________________________________6-12 Operating display ___________________________________________5-10 Operating faults ____________________________________________9-10 Operating hours counter _____________________________________8-11 Operating messages_______________________________________ 4.16-5 Operating messages recording_______________________________ 4.16-6 Operating time per tariff ___________________________________ 4.11-5 Operating time registers____________________________________ 4.11-5 Operation with only one or two phases __________________________2-11 Optical button_______________________________________________5-5 Optical interface ___________________________ 2-14, 3-5, 3-10, 6-6, 8-9 Optical test output __________________________________ 3-5, 5-16, 8-7 Output contacts _______________________________________2-13, 3-11 Output values ______________________________________________2-13 Outputs__________________________________ 2-13, 4.1-9, 4.1-7, 4.3-5 Overflow of measuring system__________________________________9-9 Overview meter function _______________________________4.1-7, 4.1-5 Ownership designation_______________________________________3-11 Parameter overwriting protection ____________________________ 4.15-5 Parametrization tool RPT01 for ripple control receivers ____________ 4.6-9 Parametrizing of the ripple control receiver______________________ 4.6-9 Parametrizing the terminal designations ________________________ 4.3-6 Periodic memory__________________________________________ 4.13-8 Periodical meter check ________________________________________8-5 Phase angle _____________________________________________ 4.2-12 Phase connections _______________________________ 2-17, 4.1-9, 4.1-7
H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+Gyr Index 11-9
Phase current_______________________________________ 4.2-5, 4.2-11 Phase voltage_______________________________________ 4.2-5, 4.2-11 Phase voltage indication ______________________________________ 5-8 Possibilities for data readout ___________________________________ 6-9 Power calculation__________________________________________ 4.2-8 Power consumption _________________________________________ 2-12 Power factor__________________________________4.2-6, 4.2-11, 4.10-5 Power factor minimum ____________________________________ 4.10-7 Power factor monitoring ___________________________________ 4.14-9 Power factor register ______________________________________ 4.10-7 Power reserve of calendar clock __________________________2-13, 4.4-6 Power supply _______________________________________ 4.1-11, 4.1-9 Primary data ____________________________________________ 4.8-12 Principle of DLMS___________________________________________ 6-12 Principle of monitoring_____________________________________ 4.14-5 Profile width_____________________________________ 4.13-14, 4.13-15 Profiles _________________________________________________ 4.13-5 Protection class ____________________________________________ 2-15 Pulse frequency of test output ________________________________ 2-13 Pulse inputs _______________________ 3-11, 4.1-9, 4.1-12, 4.1-7, 4.1-10 Pulse telegram ____________________________________________ 4.6-5 Pulse width of test output ____________________________________ 2-13 Purpose of this user manual __________________________________ 0-10 Purpose of use of meters _____________________________________ 2-6 Push buttons ________________________________________ 4.1-9, 4.1-7 Quadrant display ____________________________________________ 5-8 Quadrant numbering ______________________________________ 4.2-10 Quadrants _______________________________________________ 4.2-9 Quartz frequency __________________________________________ 4.4-6 Radio interference suppression ________________________________ 2-15 Range changeover___________________________________________ 8-6 Range of time elements_____________________________________ 4.4-5 Rapid run ____________________________________________ 5-12, 5-15 Rated frequency____________________________________________ 2-12 Rated voltage______________________________________________ 2-11 Reactive component of power________________________________ 4.2-8 Reactive power _________________________________4.2-5, 4.2-8, 4.2-9 Reactive power direction arrow_________________________________ 5-8 Reading head__________________________________________ 6-9, 8-10 Readout _________________4.4-10, 4.6-12, 4.8-11, 4.9-19, 4.10-9, 4.12-6 Readout device _____________________________________________ 6-9 Readout log _______________________________________________ 6-10 Readout of events ________________________________________ 4.13-8 Readout of load profile ___________________________________ 4.13-12 Readout to DLMS___________________________________________ 6-12 Readout to IEC 62056-21 ____________________________________ 6-10 Real Time Clock (RTC)______________________________________ 4.4-5 Recording counting pulses for other physical media ________________ 2-6 Recording of demand ______________________________________ 4.9-5 Recording of energy _______________________________________ 4.8-5 Recording of energy consumption_______________________________ 6-9 Recording of measured values __________________________ 4.8-5, 4.9-5 Recording of operating messages ____________________________ 4.16-6 Recording period of load profile _____________________________ 4.13-8 Register capacity __________________________________________ 4.9-8 Register resolution____________________________________ 4.8-8, 4.9-8
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 11-10 Index
Register size _______________________________________4.8-11, 4.9-19 Regulations for the security ____________________________________1-6 Releasing connection from spring-loaded terminal _________________7-11 Removing connections in spring-loaded terminals _________________9-12 Repair centre ______________________________________________9-14 Repairing meters ___________________________________________9-14 Replacement battery ________________________________________8-11 Representation of type designations ____________________________0-11 Reset___________________________________________________ 4.12-5 Reset block ______________________________________________ 4.12-5 Reset button R _____________________________________ 3-6, 5-6, 8-10 Resetting__________________________________________4.8-10, 4.9-13 Residual value processing ____________________________4.8-10, 4.9-11 Responsibilities for security ____________________________________1-5 Restoration of voltage _______________________________________2-14 Ripple control receiver (RCR)_____________________ 4.1-11, 4.1-9, 4.6-6 Ripple control receiver data on tariff face plate _________________ 4.6-10 Rolling display______________________________________________5-10 Rolling mean value _________________________________________ 4.9-9 Rotating field _____________________________________________ 4.2-8 RPT01 parametrization tool __________________________________ 4.6-9 RS232 interface ________________________________ 4.1-12, 4.1-10, 6-7 RS485 interface ________________________________ 4.1-12, 4.1-10, 6-7 Running mean value of demand ______________________________ 4.9-9 S0 interface____________________________________ 4.1-12, 4.1-10, 6-6 Safety pictographs ___________________________________________1-5 Safety regulations____________________________________________1-6 Seal _______________________________________________________2-6 Seal component _________________________________________3-7, 3-8 Sealing pliers _______________________________________________7-5 Sealing with padlock__________________________________________3-7 Seals ______________________________________________________3-5 Season table ______________________________________________ 4.5-6 Secondary data___________________________________________ 4.8-12 Security attributes ________________________________________ 4.15-6 Security levels____________________________________________ 4.15-5 Security system __________________________________________ 4.15-5 Self-test ______________________________________________5-10, 9-5 Sending an SMS message ____________________________4.16-6, 4.16-8 Serial interface _____________________________________________2-14 Series designation ___________________________________________2-8 Service ____________________________________________________8-5 Service and repair centre _____________________________________9-14 Service list_____________________________________________5-6, 5-14 Service menu ______________________________________________5-15 Service mode ______________________________________________5-14 Set mode ____________________________________________5-15, 8-10 Setting mode not concluded ___________________________________9-9 Signal conversion _____________________________________4.2-5, 4.2-7 Signal preparation _________________________________________ 4.2-5 Signal processing _________________________ 4.1-10, 4.1-8, 4.2-6, 4.2-7 Signal processor ______________________________________4.2-5, 4.2-8 Signal transfer ___________________________________________ 4.9-19 Signal utilization _____________________________________4.1-10, 4.1-8 Signalling of operating messages_____________________________ 4.16-5 Simple mean value _________________________________________ 4.9-9
H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Landis+Gyr Index 11-11
SMS control _____________________________________________ 4.16-8 SMS message____________________________________________ 4.16-6 Software version ____________________________________________ 2-9 Solid state relay ____________________________________________ 2-13 Spring-loaded terminals_________________________2-18, 3-9, 7-11, 9-12 Standard data _____________________________________________ 5-12 Starting current ____________________________________________ 2-11 Starting limit ______________________________________________ 2-11 Starting power ________________________________________ 2-11, 2-12 Starting test ________________________________________________ 8-8 Starting values _____________________________________________ 2-12 Status entry of load profile _________________________________ 4.13-8 Status indication arrows _____________________________________ 3-10 Status report of SMS message _____________________________ 4.16-12 Stored value_______________________________________ 4.8-10, 4.9-13 Stored values ___________________________________________ 4.13-13 Structure of error messages ___________________________________ 9-5 Structure of load profile____________________________________ 4.13-8 Subdivision of this user manual________________________________ 0-10 Substitute meter __________________________________ 8-5, 9-12, 9-14 Summer time _____________________________________________ 4.4-5 Supercap ________________________________________________ 4.4-6 Supplementary power supply _____________________ 2-14, 4.1-11, 4.1-9 Supply voltages _____________________________________ 4.1-11, 4.1-9 Survey calendar clock ______________________________________ 4.4-5 Survey communication interfaces _______________________________ 6-5 Survey demand recording ___________________________________ 4.9-5 Survey energy recording ____________________________________ 4.8-5 Survey measuring unit______________________________________ 4.2-5 Survey monitoring functions ________________________________ 4.14-5 Survey Operating messages ________________________________ 4.16-5 Survey operating time registers _____________________________ 4.11-5 Survey power factors______________________________________ 4.10-5 Survey tariff control ________________________________________ 4.7-5 Survey Time switch ________________________________________ 4.5-5 Suryey resetting__________________________________________ 4.12-5 Suspension eyelet ___________________________________________ 7-7 Suspension triangle _____________________________________ 2-16, 7-8 SYNC control signal ________________________________________ 4.4-5 Synchronization intervals____________________________________ 4.4-7 Synchronizing by the external synchronization signal _____________ 4.4-6 Synchronizing via communication interface _____________________ 4.4-8 System error in microprocessor_________________________________ 9-9 Target group of this user manual ______________________________ 0-10 Tariff control __________________________________4.1-10, 4.1-8, 4.7-5 Tariff control signals _______________________________________ 4.7-6 Tariff control via ripple control receiver ________________________ 4.6-5 Tariff face plate ____________________________________________ 3-11 Tariff structure____________________________________________ 4.5-5 Tariff switching ____________________________________ 4.9-13, 4.10-8 Tariff switching __________________________________________ 4.8-10 Technical data _____________________________________________ 2-11 Technical data of ripple control receiver ________________________ 4.6-9 Telemetering _______________________________________________ 2-6 Temperature coefficient______________________________________ 2-15 Temperature range _________________________________________ 2-15
Landis+Gyr H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual 11-12 Index
Terminal cover _____________________________________ 2-6, 2-16, 3-5 Terminal designations ______________________________________ 4.3-7 Terminal dimensions ________________________________________2-18 Terminal layout________________________________________ 3-9, 4.3-5 Test key of ripple control receiver _____________________________ 4.6-9 Test mode___________________________________________ 4.8-11, 8-5 Test output ________________________________________________2-13 Test SMS message _______________________________________ 4.16-12 Test voltage ________________________________________________8-7 Testing meter _______________________________________________8-5 Time base ________________________________________________ 4.4-6 Time change______________________________________________ 4.4-6 Time deviations ___________________________________________ 4.4-8 Time elements ____________________________________________ 4.4-5 Time measurement_________________________________________ 4.2-8 Time switch ______________________________________________ 4.5-5 Time window for reset block ________________________________ 4.12-5 Time-base error _____________________________________________9-6 Tools for installation of meters _________________________________7-5 Total active power _________________________________________ 4.2-9 Total apparent power______________________________________ 4.2-10 Total operating time_______________________________________ 4.11-5 Total reactive power________________________________________ 4.2-9 Transmission contact _________________________________________2-6 Type designation ____________________________________________2-8 Type of measurement ZFD400xx______________________________ 4.2-7 Type of measurement ZMD400xx _____________________________ 4.2-6 Types of display ____________________________________________5-10 Types of energy recording ___________________________________ 4.8-8 Types of error_______________________________________________9-6 Types of monitoring _______________________________________ 4.14-5 Types of synchronizing______________________________________ 4.4-6 Units field __________________________________________________5-8 Upper part of meter case ______________________________________2-6 Value display__________________________________________5-12, 5-15 Value field__________________________________________________5-8 Value of operating messages ________________________________ 4.16-6 Value register ________________________________________4.8-7, 4.9-7 Values available for readout and display __________ 4.9-20, 4.10-9, 4.12-6 Versions of communication units ________________________________6-6 Versions of energy recording ____________________________4.8-5, 4.9-5 Viewing window _____________________________________________2-6 Voltage divider ____________________________________________ 4.2-7 Voltage interruption _________________________________________2-14 Voltage monitoring ________________________________________ 4.14-7 Voltage range ______________________________________________2-11 Voltage restoration __________________________________________2-14 Weekdays ________________________________________________ 4.4-5 Weight of meter ____________________________________________2-16 Winter time_______________________________________________ 4.4-5 Zero passage _______________________________________4.2-8, 4.2-12 ZMD300CT _________________________________________________2-6
Recommended